datatool 1.01 (20aug07)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@4804 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

5 files changed, 38 insertions, 12456 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README
index 34e1b34558a..581ed50375f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-LaTeX Bundle : datatool v1.0 (datatool.sty, datapie.sty, dataplot.sty, databar.sty)
+LaTeX Bundle : datatool v1.01 (datatool.sty, datapie.sty, dataplot.sty, databar.sty, databib.sty)
 
-Last Modified : 23 July 2007
+Last Modified : 17 Aug 2007
 
 Author        : Nicola Talbot
 
@@ -72,6 +72,11 @@ databar.sty:
 
  Hooks provided to annotate chart.
 
+databib.sty:
+
+ Provides commands to convert a BibTeX database into a datatool
+ database.
+
 *The datatool bundle replaces the csvtools bundle which is now obsolete.*
 
 The datatool.sty package requires the following packages/files:
@@ -80,7 +85,6 @@ xkeyval
 xfor
 fp
 substr
-compare.tex
 
 The datapie.sty, dataplot.sty and databar.sty packages requires 
 the tikz/pgf package.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES
index 11c7fa0086c..a898c349e78 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES
@@ -1 +1,32 @@
+v1.01 (2007/08/17) :
+ * Added databib package.
+
+ * datatool.sty:
+
+   - Fixed bug in datatool caused when certain commands occur
+     in database entries or when the data type is tested.
+   - Fixed bug in \DTLsubstituteall (caused problems when certain
+   - commands occurred in string)
+   - Added \DTLsplitstring
+   - Added \DTLifSubString and \DTLisSubString
+   - Added \DTLifStartsWith and \DTLisPrefix
+   - Added case insensitive string tests
+   - \DTLinitials and \DTLstoreinitials now work with ~ and \space
+   - \DTLinitials and \DTLstoreinitials now use \DTLinitialhyphen
+   - Added \dtlcompare (no longer using compare.tex)
+   - Added \DTLgetvalueforkey
+   - Added \DTLgetrowforkey
+   - Added optional argument to \DTLsort
+   - Fixed bug causing expansion in \DTLsort
+   - Fixed bug in \DTLsdforall and \DTLvarianceforall
+   - Removed extraneous spaces in \DTLaddall, \DTLminall, 
+     \DTLmaxall, \DTLmeanforall, \DTLsdforall and \DTLvarianceforall
+   - Fixed bug in \DTLiflastrow
+   - Fixed bug in \DTLremovecurrentrow
+
+ * Manual:
+   - added code that produces fig "Student Marks (with average scores".
+   - fixed typos in examples "Editing Database Rows" & "Mail Merging"
+   - added section on null values
+
 v1.0 (2007/07/23) : Initial Release
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf
index 7a2784f1ee0..eb622488c8e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index a7363848b5a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12428 +0,0 @@
-%\iffalse
-% datatool.dtx generated using makedtx version 0.93b (c) Nicola Talbot
-% Command line args:
-%   -src "datatool.sty=>datatool.sty"
-%   -src "datapie.sty=>datapie.sty"
-%   -src "dataplot.sty=>dataplot.sty"
-%   -src "databar.sty=>databar.sty"
-%   -doc "manual.tex"
-%   -author "Nicola Talbot"
-%   -codetitle "datatool.sty"
-%   -dir "source"
-%   datatool
-% Created on 2007/7/23 22:53
-%\fi
-%\iffalse
-%<*package>
-%% \CharacterTable
-%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
-%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
-%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
-%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
-%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
-%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
-%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
-%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
-%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
-%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
-%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
-%</package>
-%\fi
-% \iffalse
-% Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e
-% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
-% \fi
-% \iffalse
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage{ifthen}
-\usepackage{alltt}
-\usepackage[verbose=false]{datatool}
-\usepackage{datapie,databar}
-\usepackage{textcomp}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{colortbl}
-\usepackage[colorlinks,
-            bookmarks,
-            hyperindex=false,
-            pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot},
-            pdftitle={datatool: Databases and data manipulation},
-            pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,database,data,chart,plot}]{hyperref}
-\usetikzlibrary{snakes}
-
- %hyperindex conflicts with doc
- %(end up with |usage|hyperpage in indexentry)
- %This unfortunately means that the changes section doesn't
- %have active links, but at least it will keep makeindex happy.
-
-\renewcommand{\usage}[1]{\textit{\hyperpage{#1}}}
-\renewcommand{\main}[1]{\hyperpage{#1}}
-\newcommand{\see}[2]{\emph{see} #1}
-\makeatletter
-\def\index@prologue{\section*{Index}}
-
- % commands are too wide for a 3 column index
-  \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
-    \columnseprule \z@  \columnsep 35\p@
-    \twocolumn[\index@prologue]%
-    \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
-  \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
-\makeatother
-\RecordChanges
-\PageIndex
-\CheckSum{8992}
-\CodelineNumbered
-
-\newcommand*{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\env}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\definecolor{defbackground}{rgb}{0.8,1,1}
-
-\makeatletter
-\newcommand*{\setting}[2]{\textsf{#2}\relax
-\@for\thiscmd:=#1\do{%
-\edef\doindex{\noexpand\index
-{\thiscmd\space settings=\noexpand\cs{\thiscmd} settings>#2=\noexpand
-\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}\doindex
-}}
-\makeatother
-
-\newcommand*{\counterfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index
-{#1 counter=\texttt{#1} counter|hyperpage}}
-
-\newcommand*{\ics}[1]{\cs{#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}
-
-\newsavebox\defsbox
-\newenvironment{definition}{%
-\begin{lrbox}{\defsbox}%
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-}{%
-\end{minipage}
-\end{lrbox}%
-\vskip10pt
-\noindent
-{\setlength{\fboxsep}{4pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{1.25pt}%
-\fcolorbox{black}{defbackground}{\usebox\defsbox}%
-}\vskip10pt
-}
-
-\newcommand*{\pkgopt}[2][datatool]{\textsf{#2}\index
-{#1 package options=\textsf{#1} package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}
-
-\newcounter{example}
-\newcommand*{\examplename}{example}
-\makeatletter
-\newenvironment{example}[2]{\refstepcounter{example}\label{#2}%
-\par\vskip10pt\noindent
-\textbf{\large Example \theexample\ (#1)}%
-\addcontentsline{loe}{section}{\protect\numberline{\theexample}#1}%
-\nopagebreak\par\vskip10pt\nopagebreak
-}%
-{\begin{center}\rule{2in}{1pt}\end{center}}
-
-\newcommand*{\listofexamples}{\section*{List of Examples}%
-\@starttoc{loe}}
-\makeatother
-
-
-\begin{document}
-\DocInput{datatool.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-%\fi
-%\MakeShortVerb{"}
-%\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
-%
-% \title{datatool v 1.0: Databases and data manipulation}
-% \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt]
-%School of Computing Sciences\\
-%University of East Anglia\\
-%Norwich. Norfolk\\
-%NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\
-%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}}
-%
-% \date{23rd July 2007}
-% \maketitle
-%\tableofcontents
-%\listofexamples
-%
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% \changes{1.0}{2007 July 22}{Initial version}
-%The \sty{datatool} bundle consists of the following
-%packages: \sty{datatool}, \sty{datapie}, \sty{dataplot} and
-%\sty{databar}. 
-%
-%The \sty{datatool} package can be used to:
-%\begin{itemize}
-%\item Create or load databases.
-%\item Sort rows of a database (either numerically or alphabetically,
-%ascending or descending.)
-%\item Perform repetitive operations on each row of a database
-%(e.g.\ mail merging.) Conditions may be imposed to exclude rows.
-%\item Determine where an argument is an integer, a real number,
-%currency or a string. (Scientific notation is currently not
-%supported.) Locale dependent number settings are supported (such
-%as a comma as a decimal character and a full stop as a number
-%group character.)
-%\item Convert locale dependent numbers/currency to the decimal
-%format required by the \sty{fp} package, enabling fixed point
-%arithmetic to be performed on elements of the database.
-%\item Names can be converted to initials.
-%\item Strings can be tested to determine if they are all
-%upper or lower case.
-%\end{itemize}
-%
-%The \sty{datapie} package can be used to convert a database into
-%a pie chart:
-%\begin{itemize}
-%\item Segments can be separated from the rest of the chart to make
-%them stand out.
-%\item Colour/grey scale options.
-%\item Predefined segment colours can be changed.
-%\item Hooks provided to add extra information to the chart
-%\end{itemize}
-%
-%The \sty{databar} package can be used to convert a database into
-%a bar chart:
-%\begin{itemize}
-%\item Colour/grey scale options.
-%\item Predefined bar colours can be changed.
-%\item Hooks provided to add extra information to the chart
-%\end{itemize}
-%
-%(The \sty{datapie} and \sty{databar} packages do not support the
-%creation of 3D charts, and I have no plans to implement them at any
-%later date. The use of 3D charts should be discouraged. They may look
-%pretty, but the purpose of a chart is to be informative. Three
-%dimensional graphics cause distortion, which can result in misleading
-%impressions.)
-%
-%The \sty{dataplot} package can be used to convert a database into
-%a two dimensional plot using markers and/or lines. Three dimensional
-%plots are currently not supported.
-%
-%\textbf{This package replaces the \sty{csvtools} package which is now
-%obsolete.}
-%
-%\section{Data Types}
-%\label{sec:datatypes}
-%
-%The \sty{datatool} package recognises four data types: integers,
-%real numbers, currency and strings.
-%
-%\begin{description}
-%\item[Integers] An integer is a sequence of digits, optionally 
-%groups of three digits may be separated by the number group character.
-%The default number group character is a comma (,) but may be
-%changed using \cs{DTLsetnumberchars} (see below.)
-%
-%\item[Real Numbers] A real number is an integer followed by the
-%decimal character followed by one or more digits. The decimal
-%character is a full stop (.) by default. The number group 
-%and decimal characters may be changed using
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetnumberchars}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetnumberchars}\marg{number group character}\marg{decimal character}
-%\end{definition}
-%Note that scientific notation is not supported, and the number group
-%character may not be used after the decimal character.
-%
-%\item[Currency] A currency symbol followed by an integer or
-%real number is considered to be the currency data type.
-%There are two predefined currency symbols, "\$" and \cs{pounds}.
-%In addition, if any of the following commands are defined at the
-%start of the document, they are also considered to be a currency 
-%symbol: \cs{texteuro}, \cs{textdollar}, \cs{textstirling},
-%\cs{textyen}, \cs{textwon}, \cs{textcurrency}, \cs{euro}
-%and \cs{yen}. Additional currency symbols can be defined using
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLnewcurrencysymbol}\marg{symbol}
-%\end{definition}
-%
-%\item[Strings] Anything that doesn't belong to the above three
-%types is considered to be a string.
-%
-%\end{description}
-%
-%\subsection{Conditionals}
-%\label{sec:ifconditions}
-%
-%The following conditionals are provided by the \sty{datatool}
-%package:
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifint}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifint}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{text} is an integer then do \meta{true part}, otherwise
-%do \meta{false part}. For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifint{2536}{integer}{not an integer}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifint{2536}{integer}{not an integer}.
-%
-%The number group character may appear in the number, for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer}.
-%However, the number group character may only be followed by a group 
-%of three digits.  For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifint{2,5,3,6}{integer}{not an integer}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifint{2,5,3,6}{integer}{not an integer}.
-%The number group character may be changed. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}%
-%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%this now produces: 
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}\relax
-%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer}, since 2,536 is now
-%a real number.
-%
-%Note that nothing else can be appended or prepended to the
-%number. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}%
-%\DTLifint{2,536m}{integer}{not an integer}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}\relax
-%\DTLifint{2,536m}{integer}{not an integer}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifreal}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifreal}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{text} is a real number then do \meta{true part}, otherwise
-%do \meta{false part}. For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifreal{1000.0}{real}{not real}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifreal{1000.0}{real}{not real}.
-%
-%Note that an integer is not a real number:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real}.
-%
-%Whereas
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifreal{1,000.0}{real}{not real}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifreal{1,000.0}{real}{not real}.
-%
-%However
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}%
-%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}\relax
-%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real} since the comma is now
-%the decimal character.
-%
-%Currency is not considered to be real:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}%
-%\DTLifreal{\$1.00}{real}{not real}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}\relax
-%\DTLifreal{\$1.00}{real}{not real}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifcurrency}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifcurrency}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{text} is currency, then do \meta{true part}, otherwise
-%do false part. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrency{\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifcurrency{\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}. Similarly:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrency{\pounds5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifcurrency{\pounds5.99}{currency}{not currency}.
-%Note, however, that
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}. If you want
-%this to be considered currency, you will have to add the
-%sequence "US\$" to the set of currency symbols:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{US\$}%
-%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%this now produces:
-%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{US\$}\relax
-%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}.
-%
-%This document has used the \sty{textcomp} package which defines
-%\cs{texteuro}, so this is also considered to be currency. For
-%example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro5.99}{currency}{not currency}.
-%
-%The preferred method is to display the euro symbol in a sans-serif
-%font, but
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrency{\textsf{\texteuro}5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLifcurrency{\textsf{\texteuro}5.99}{currency}{not currency}.
-%
-%It is better to define a new command, for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DeclareRobustCommand*{\euro}{\textsf{\texteuro}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%and add that command to the list of currency symbols. In fact,
-%in this case, if you define the command \cs{euro} in the 
-%preamble, it will automatically be added to the list of known
-%currency symbols. If however you define \cs{euro} in the document,
-%you will have to add it using \ics{DTLnewcurrencysymbol}. For
-%example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\newcommand*{\euro}{\textsf{\texteuro}}%
-%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\euro}%
-%\DTLifcurrency{\euro5.99}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DeclareRobustCommand*{\euro}{\textsf{\texteuro}}\relax
-%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\euro}\relax
-%\DTLifcurrency{\euro5.99}{currency}{not currency}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifcurrencyunit}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifcurrencyunit}\marg{text}\marg{symbol}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{text} is currency, and uses \meta{symbol} as the unit of
-%currency, then do \meta{true part} otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}{dollars}{not dollars}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}{dollars}{not dollars}.
-%Another example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\def\cost{\euro10.50}%
-%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\cost}{\euro}{euros}{not euros}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\def\cost{\euro10.50}\relax
-%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\cost}{\euro}{euros}{not euros}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumerical}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumerical}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{text} is numerical (either an integer, real number or
-%currency) then do \meta{true part} otherwise do 
-%\meta{false part}. 
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}.
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces: \DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}.
-%Whereas
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}%
-%\DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}.
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}\relax
-%\DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}.
-%Since the number group character is now a full stop, and the
-%decimal character is now a comma. (The number group character
-%may only appear before the decimal character, not after it.)
-%
-%Currency is also considered to be numerical:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}%
-%\DTLifnumerical{\$1,000.0}{number}{string}.
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}\relax
-%\DTLifnumerical{\$1,000.0}{number}{string}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstring}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstring}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is the opposite of \cs{DTLifnumerical}. If \meta{text} is
-%not numerical, do \meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifcasedatatype}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifcasedatatype}\marg{text}\marg{string case}\marg{int case}\marg{real case}\marg{currency case}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{text} is a string do \meta{string case}, if \meta{text}
-%is an integer do \meta{int case}, if \meta{text} is a real number
-%do \meta{real case}, if \meta{text} is currency do 
-%\meta{currency case}. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcasedatatype{1,000}{string}{integer}{real}{currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifcasedatatype{1,000}{string}{integer}{real}{currency}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumlt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumlt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{num1} is less than \meta{num2}, then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that both \meta{num1} and
-%\meta{num2} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or
-%currency.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringlt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringlt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{string1} is alphabetically less than \meta{string2}, then do
-%\meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifstringlt{aardvark}{zebra}{less}{not less}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifstringlt{aardvark}{zebra}{less}{not less}.
-%
-%Note that both \meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are considered to be
-%strings, so for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifstringlt{2}{10}{less}{not less}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifstringlt{2}{10}{less}{not less}, since the string "2" 
-%comes after the string "10" when arranged alphabetically.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiflt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiflt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are both numerical, then this
-%is equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumlt}, otherwise it is equivalent
-%to \cs{DTLstringlt}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumgt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumgt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{num1} is greater than \meta{num2}, then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that both \meta{num1} and
-%\meta{num2} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or
-%currency.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringgt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringgt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{string1} is alphabetically greater than \meta{string2}, then
-%do \meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}.  For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifstringgt{aardvark}{zebra}{greater}{not greater}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifstringgt{aardvark}{zebra}{greater}{not greater}.
-%
-%Note that both \meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are considered to be
-%strings, so for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifstringgt{2}{10}{greater}{not greater}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifstringgt{2}{10}{greater}{not greater}, since the string "2" 
-%comes after the string "10" when arranged alphabetically.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifgt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifgt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are both numerical, then this
-%is equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumgt}, otherwise it is equivalent
-%to \cs{DTLstringgt}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumeq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumeq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{num1} is equal to \meta{num2}, then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that both \meta{num1} and
-%\meta{num2} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or
-%currency.) The currency symbol is ignored when determining 
-%equality. For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{10.5}{true}{false}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{10.5}{true}{false}, since they are
-%considered to be numerically equivalent. Likewise:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{\$10.50}{true}{false}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{\$10.50}{true}{false}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringeq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringeq}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are identical, then do
-%\meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}. Again, both
-%\meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are considered to be strings,
-%so for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifstringeq{10.50}{10.5}{true}{false}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifstringeq{10.50}{10.5}{true}{false}.
-%
-%Note that the comparison is case sensitive, so for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifstringeq{Text}{text}{true}{false}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifstringeq{Text}{text}{true}{false}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifeq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifeq}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical, then this is
-%equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumeq}, otherwise it is equivalent to
-%\cs{DTLifstringeq}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max}  then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that \meta{num}, \meta{min} and
-%\meta{max} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or
-%currency.) The currency symbol is ignored when determining 
-%equality. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}.
-%Note that the closed range includes end points:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%This determines if \meta{string} is between \meta{min} and
-%\meta{max} in the alphabetical sense, or is equal to either
-%\meta{min} or \meta{max}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are numerical, then this is
-%equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}, otherwise it is equivalent to
-%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumopenbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max}  then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that \meta{num}, \meta{min} and
-%\meta{max} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or
-%currency.) Again, the currency symbol is ignored when determining 
-%equality. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}.
-%Note that end points are not included. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%This determines if \meta{string} is between \meta{min} and
-%\meta{max} in the alphabetical sense, or is equal to either
-%\meta{min} or \meta{max}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are numerical, then this is
-%equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}, otherwise it is equivalent to
-%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifFPclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifFPclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max}  then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part} where \meta{num}, \meta{min}
-%and \meta{max} are all in standard fixed point notation (i.e.\
-%no number group separator, no currency symbols and a full stop as 
-%a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifFPopenbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifFPopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max}  then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part} where \meta{num}, \meta{min}
-%and \meta{max} are all in standard fixed point notation (i.e.\
-%no number group separator, no currency symbols and a full stop as 
-%a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifAllUpperCase}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifAllUpperCase}\marg{string}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{string} is all upper case. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{WORD}{all upper}{not all upper}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{WORD}{all upper}{not all upper},
-%whereas
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{Word}{all upper}{not all upper}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{Word}{all upper}{not all upper}.
-%Note also that:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{\MakeUppercase{word}}{all upper}{not all upper}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%also produces:
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{\MakeUppercase{word}}{all upper}{not all upper}.
-%\cs{MakeTextUppercase} (defined in David Carlisle's \sty{textcase}
-%package) and \cs{uppercase} are also detected, otherwise, if
-%a command is encountered, the case of the command is considered.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{MAN{\OE}UVRE}{all upper}{not all upper}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifAllUpperCase{MAN{\OE}UVRE}{all upper}{not all upper}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifAllLowerCase}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifAllLowerCase}\marg{string}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{string} is all lower case. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{word}{all lower}{not all lower}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{word}{all lower}{not all lower},
-%whereas
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{Word}{all lower}{not all lower}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{Word}{all lower}{not all lower}.
-%Note also that:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{\MakeLowercase{WORD}}{all lower}{not all lower}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%also produces:
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{\MakeLowercase{WORD}}{all lower}{not all lower}.
-%\cs{MakeTextLowercase} (defined in David Carlisle's \sty{textcase}
-%package) and \cs{lowercase} are also detected, otherwise, if
-%a command is encountered, the case of the command is considered.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{man{\oe}uvre}{all lower}{not all lower}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLifAllLowerCase{man{\oe}uvre}{all lower}{not all lower}.
-%
-%\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\sty{ifthen}}{ifthen} conditionals}
-%\label{sec:ifthen}
-%
-%The commands described in the previous section can not be
-%used as the conditional part of the \cs{ifthenelse} or
-%\cs{whiledo} commands provided by the \sty{ifthen} package.
-%This section describes analogous commands which may only be
-%used in the conditional argument of \cs{ifthenelse} and
-%\cs{whiledo}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisstring}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisstring}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{text} is a string. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisstring{some text}}{string}{not a string}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisstring{some text}}{string}{not a string}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisnumerical}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisnumerical}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{text} is numerical (i.e.\ not a string.) For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\$10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\$10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}.
-%
-%Note however that \cs{DTLisnumerical} requires more care than
-%\cs{DTLifnumerical} when used with some of the other currency
-%symbols. Consider:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifnumerical{\pounds10.95}{numerical}{not numerical}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces:
-%\DTLifnumerical{\pounds10.95}{numerical}{not numerical}.
-%However
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}.
-%This is due to the expansion that occurs within \cs{ifthenelse}.
-%This can be prevented using \cs{noexpand}, for example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}.
-%
-%Likewise:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\def\cost{\pounds10.95}%
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\cost}}{numerical}{not numerical}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces
-%\def\cost{\pounds10.95}\relax
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\cost}}{numerical}{not numerical}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiscurrency}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiscurrency}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{text} is currency. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrency{\$10.95}}{currency}{not currency}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrency{\$10.95}}{currency}{not currency}.
-%
-%The same warning given above for \cs{DTLisnumerical} also applies
-%here.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiscurrencyunit}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiscurrencyunit}\marg{text}\marg{symbol}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{text} is currency, and uses \meta{symbol} as the unit 
-%of currency.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}}{dollars}{not dollars}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}}{dollars}{not dollars}
-%Another example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\def\cost{\euro10.50}%
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\noexpand\cost}{\noexpand\euro}}%
-%{euros}{not euros}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\def\cost{\euro10.50}\relax
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\noexpand\cost}{\noexpand\euro}}%
-%{euros}{not euros}. Again note the use of \cs{noexpand}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisreal}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisreal}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{text} is a fixed point number (again, an integer is 
-%not considered to be a fixed point number.) For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisreal{1.5}}{real}{not real}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisreal{1.5}}{real}{not real}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisint}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisint}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%Tests if \meta{text} is an integer. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisint{153}}{integer}{not an integer}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLisint{153}}{integer}{not an integer}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLislt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLislt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{arg1} is less than \meta{arg2}. As with
-%\cs{DTLiflt}, if \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical,
-%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical
-%comparison is used.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisgt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisgt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{arg1} is greater than \meta{arg2}. As with
-%\cs{DTLifgt}, if \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical,
-%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical
-%comparison is used.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiseq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiseq}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{arg1} is equal to \meta{arg2}. As with
-%\cs{DTLifeq}, if \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical,
-%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical
-%comparison is used.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{arg} lies between \meta{min} and 
-%\meta{max} (end points included.) As with
-%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}, if the arguments are numerical,
-%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical
-%comparison is used.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisopenbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisopenbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{arg} lies between \meta{min} and 
-%\meta{max} (end points excluded.) As with
-%\cs{DTLifopenbetween}, if the arguments are numerical,
-%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical
-%comparison is used.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPlt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPlt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num1} is less than \meta{num2}, where both
-%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPlteq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPlteq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num1} is less than or equal to \meta{num2}, where both
-%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPgt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPgt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num1} is greater than \meta{num2}, where both
-%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPgteq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPgteq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num1} is greater than or equal to \meta{num2}, where both
-%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPeq}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPeq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num1} is equal to \meta{num2}, where both
-%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPclosedbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num} lies between \meta{min} and 
-%\meta{max} (end points included.) All arguments must be
-%numbers in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPopenbetween}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLisFPopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}
-%\end{definition}
-%This checks if \meta{num} lies between \meta{min} and 
-%\meta{max} (end points excluded.) All arguments must be
-%numbers in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group
-%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.)
-%
-%\section{Fixed Point Arithmetic}
-%\label{sec:fp}
-%
-%The \sty{datatool} package uses the \sty{fp} package to perform
-%fixed point arithmetic, however all numbers must be converted
-%from the locale dependent format into the format required by the
-%\sty{fp} package. A numerical value (i.e.\ an integer, a real
-%or currency) can be converted into a plain decimal number using
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLconverttodecimal}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLconverttodecimal}\marg{num}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%The decimal number will be stored in \meta{cmd} which must be
-%a control sequence. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLconverttodecimal{1,563.54}{\mynum}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLconverttodecimal{1,563.54}{\mynum}\relax
-%will define \cs{mynum} to be \texttt{\mynum}. The command
-%can then be used in any of the arithmetic macros provided by the
-%\sty{fp} package. There are two commands provided to perform
-%the reverse:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdecimaltolocale}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdecimaltolocale}\marg{number}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This converts a plain decimal number \meta{number} (that uses a full
-%stop as the decimal character and has no number group characters)
-%into a locale dependent format. The resulting number is stored
-%in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLdecimaltolocale{6795.3}{\mynum}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLdecimaltolocale{6795.3}{\mynum}
-%will define \cs{mynum} to be \texttt{\mynum}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdecimaltocurrency}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}\marg{number}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This will convert a plain decimal number \meta{number} into a
-%locale dependent currency format. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price.
-%
-%The currency symbol used by \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency} is 
-%initially "\$", but will use the currency last encountered.
-%So, for example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro45.00}{}{}%
-%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro45.00}{}{}\relax
-%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price. This is because
-%the last currency symbol to be encountered was \cs{texteuro}.
-%You can reset the currency symbol using the command:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetdefaultcurrency}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetdefaultcurrency}\marg{symbol}
-%\end{definition}
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsetdefaultcurrency{\textyen}%
-%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLsetdefaultcurrency{\textyen}\relax
-%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price
-%
-%The \sty{datatool} package provides convenience commands which
-%use \cs{DTLconverttodecimal}, and then use the basic macros provided
-%by the \sty{fp} package. The resulting value is then converted
-%back into the locale format using
-%\cs{DTLdecimaltolocale} or \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLadd}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLadd}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgadd}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgadd}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to \meta{num1}+\meta{num2}.
-%\cs{DLTadd} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgadd} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result. Since 
-%\cs{DTLconverttodecimal} can also convert currency, you can
-%also add prices. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\pounds452.2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\pounds452.2}\result.
-%
-%Note that \sty{datatool} isn't aware of exchange rates! If you
-%use different currency symbols, the last symbol will be used.
-%For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\euro452.2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\euro452.2}\result.
-%
-%Likewise, if one value is a number and the other is a currency,
-%the type of the last value, \meta{num2}, will be used for the
-%result. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{\$452.2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{\$452.2}\result.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLaddall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgaddall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the sum of all
-%the numbers in \meta{number list}.
-%\cs{DLTaddall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgaddall} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLaddall{\total}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\total
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLaddall{\total}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\total.
-%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain
-%a comma, you must group the number. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLaddall{\total}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\total
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLaddall{\total}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\total.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsub}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsub}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgsub}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgsub}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to 
-%\meta{num1}$-$\meta{num2}.
-%\cs{DLTsub} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgsub} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsub{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLsub{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result. As with \cs{DTLadd},
-%\meta{num1} and \meta{num2} may be currency.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmul}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmul}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmul}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmul}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to 
-%\meta{num1}$\times$\meta{num2}.
-%\cs{DLTmul} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmul} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmul{\result}{568.95}{2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLmul{\result}{568.95}{2}\result. Again, \meta{num1} or 
-%\meta{num2} may be currency, but unlike \cs{DTLadd} and \cs{DTLsub},
-%currency overrides integer/real. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmul{\result}{\pounds568.95}{2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLmul{\result}{\pounds568.95}{2}\result. Likewise,
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmul{\result}{2}{\pounds568.95}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLmul{\result}{2}{\pounds568.95}\result. Although it doesn't make
-%sense to multiply two currencies, \sty{datatool} will allow
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmul{\result}{\$2}{\pounds568.95}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%which will produce:
-%\DTLmul{\result}{\$2}{\pounds568.95}\result.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdiv}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdiv}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgdiv}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgdiv}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to 
-%\meta{num1}$\div$\meta{num2}.
-%\cs{DLTdiv} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgdiv} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLdiv{\result}{501}{2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLdiv{\result}{501}{2}\result. Again, \meta{num1} or \meta{num2}
-%may be currency, but the resulting type will be not be a currency
-%if both \meta{num1} and \meta{num2} use the same currency symbol.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{\$2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{\$2}\result. Whereas
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%will produce:
-%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{2}\result.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLabs}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLabs}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgabs}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgabs}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets \meta{cmd} to the absolute value of \meta{num}.
-%\cs{DLTabs} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgabs} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLabs{\result}{-\pounds2.50}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLabs{\result}{-\pounds2.50}\result.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLneg}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLneg}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgneg}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgneg}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets \meta{cmd} to the negative of \meta{num}.
-%\cs{DLTneg} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgneg} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLneg{\result}{\pounds2.50}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLneg{\result}{\pounds2.50}\result.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsqrt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsqrt}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgsqrt}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgsqrt}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets \meta{cmd} to the sqrt root of \meta{num}.
-%\cs{DLTsqrt} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgsqrt} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsqrt{\result}{2}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsqrt{\result}{2}\result.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmin}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmin}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmin}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmin}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the minimum of
-%\meta{num1} and \meta{num2}.
-%\cs{DLTmin} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmin} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{32}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{32}\result.
-%Again, \meta{num1} and \meta{num2} may
-%be currency. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{\pounds32}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{\pounds32}\result, whereas
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds256}{32}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds256}{32}\result. As mentioned above,
-%\sty{datatool} doesn't know about exchange rates, so be careful
-%about mixing currencies. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds5}{\$6}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds5}{\$6}\result, which may not necessarily
-%be true!
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgminall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the minimum of all
-%the numbers in \meta{number list}.
-%\cs{DLTminall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgminall} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLminall{\theMin}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMin
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLminall{\theMin}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMin.
-%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain
-%a comma, you must group the number. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLminall{\theMin}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMin
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLminall{\theMin}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMin.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmax}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmax}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmax}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmax}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the maximum of
-%\meta{num1} and \meta{num2}.
-%\cs{DLTmax} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmax} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmax{\result}{256}{32}\result
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmax{\result}{256}{32}\result.
-%Again, \meta{num1} and \meta{num2} may
-%be currency, but the same warnings for \cs{DTLmin} apply.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmaxall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmaxall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the maximum of all
-%the numbers in \meta{number list}.
-%\cs{DLTmaxall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmaxall} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMax
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMax.
-%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain
-%a comma, you must group the number. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMax
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMax.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmeanforall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmeanall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the arithmetic mean of all
-%the numbers in \meta{number list}.
-%\cs{DLTmeanforall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmeanforall} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMean
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMean.
-%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain
-%a comma, you must group the number. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMean
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMean.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLvarianceforall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgvarianceforall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the variance of all
-%the numbers in \meta{number list}.
-%\cs{DLTvarianceforall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgvarianceforall} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLvarianceforall{\theVar}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theVar
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLvarianceforall{\theVar}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theVar.
-%Again note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} 
-%contain a comma, you must group the number.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsdforall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgsdforall}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the standard deviation of all
-%the numbers in \meta{number list}.
-%\cs{DLTsdforall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgsdforall} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theSD
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theSD.
-%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain
-%a comma, you must group the number. Example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theSD
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theSD.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLround}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLround}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLground}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLground}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} rounded to \meta{num digits}
-%after the decimal character.
-%\cs{DLTround} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLground} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLtrunc}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLtrunc}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgtrunc}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgtrunc}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} truncated to \meta{num digits}
-%after the decimal character.
-%\cs{DLTtrunc} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgtrunc} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLclip}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLclip}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgclip}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgclip}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} with all unnecessary 0's
-%removed.
-%\cs{DLTclip} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgclip} sets
-%\meta{cmd} globally.
-%
-%\section{Strings}
-%
-%Strings are considered to be anything non-numerical. The 
-%\sty{datatool} package loads the \sty{substr} package, so
-%you can use the commands defined in that package to determine
-%if one string is contained in another string. In addition,
-%the \sty{datatool} provides the following macros:
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLinitials}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLinitials}\marg{string}
-%\end{definition}
-%This converts \meta{string} (typically a name) into initials.
-%For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLinitials{Mary Ann}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLinitials{Mary Ann}. Note that
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLinitials{Mary-Ann}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces:
-%\DTLinitials{Mary-Ann}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLstoreinitials}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLstoreinitials}\marg{string}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This converts \meta{string} into initials and stores the
-%result in \meta{cmd}.
-%
-%The above commands rely on the following to format the
-%initials:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLafterinitials}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLafterinitials}
-%\end{definition}
-%This indicates what to do at the end of the initials. This
-%simply does a full stop by default.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbetweeninitials}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbetweeninitials}
-%\end{definition}
-%This indicates what to do between initials. This does a 
-%full stop followed by a space by default.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen}
-%\end{definition}
-%This indicates what to do between an initial and a hyphen.
-%This simply does a full stop by default.
-%
-%\section{Databases}
-%\label{sec:databases}
-%
-%The \sty{datatool} package provides a means of creating and
-%loading databases. Once a database has been created (or loaded),
-%it is possible to iterate through each row of data, to make it
-%easier to perform repetitive actions, such as mail merging.
-%
-%\subsection{Creating a New Database}
-%\label{sec:newdb}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewdb}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLnewdb}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command creates a new empty database called \meta{db name}. You
-%can test if a database is empty using:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifdbempty}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifdbempty}\marg{db name}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If the database called \meta{db name} is empty, do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLrowcount}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLrowcount}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command displays the number of rows in the database called
-%\meta{db name}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLnewrow}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command starts a new row in the database called \meta{db name}.
-%This new row becomes the current row when adding new entries.
-%
-%For example, the following creates an empty database called
-%\texttt{mydata}:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{mydata}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{mydata}\relax
-%The following tests if the database is empty:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}!
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces:
-%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}!
-%
-%The following adds an empty row to the database, this is the
-%first row of the database:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}\relax
-%Note that even though the only row in the database is currently
-%empty, the database is no longer considered to be empty:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}!
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This now produces:
-%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}! The row count is 
-%given by
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLrowcount{mydata}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%which produces:
-%\DTLrowcount{mydata}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewdbentry}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLnewdbentry}\marg{db name}\marg{key}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-%This creates a new entry with the identifier \meta{key} whose value
-%is \meta{value} and adds it to the current row of the database
-%called \meta{db name}. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Smith}
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{John}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Adds an entry with identifier \texttt{Surname} and value
-%\texttt{Smith} to the current row of the database named
-%\texttt{mydata}, and then adds an entry with identifier
-%\texttt{FirstName} and value \texttt{John}.
-%
-%Note that database entries can't contain paragraph breaks as 
-%many of the macros used by \sty{datatool} are short commands.
-%If you do need a paragraph break in an entry, you can instead
-%use the command:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpar}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpar}
-%\end{definition}
-%
-%\subsection{Loading a Database from an External ASCII File}
-%\label{sec:loaddb}
-%
-%Instead of using the commands described in \autoref{sec:newdb}
-%to create a new database, you can load a database from an
-%external ASCII file using:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLloaddb}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLloaddb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-%This creates a new database called \meta{db name}, and fills
-%it with the entries given in the file \meta{filename}.
-%The filename must have a header row at the start of the file,
-%which provides the \meta{key} when creating a new database entry
-%using \ics{DTLnewdbentry}. By default, the entries in the database
-%must be separated by a comma, and optionally delimited by the
-%double quote character (\verb|"|). The separator can be changed
-%to a tab separator using the command:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsettabseparator}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsettabseparator}
-%\end{definition}
-%To set the separator to a character other than a tab, you need to use
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetseparator}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetseparator}\marg{character}
-%\end{definition}
-%The delimiter can be changed using
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetdelimiter}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetdelimiter}\marg{character}
-%\end{definition}
-%
-%For example, suppose you have a file called \texttt{mydata.csv}
-%which contains the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%FirstName,Surname,Score
-%John,"Smith, Jr",68
-%Jane,Brown,75
-%Andy,Brown,42
-%Z\"oe,Adams,52
-%\end{verbatim}
-%then
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{mydata}{mydata.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%is equivalent to:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{mydata}
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{John}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Smith, Jr}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{68}%
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{Jane}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Brown}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{75}%
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{Andy}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Brown}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{42}%
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{Z\"oe}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{52}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Adams}%
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Note that the entry \texttt{Smith, Jr} had to be delimited in
-%\texttt{mydata.csv} using the double quote character since it
-%contained a comma which is used as the separator.
-%
-%The file used in the above example contained a \LaTeX\ command,
-%namely \verb|\"|. When using \ics{DTLloaddb} all the special 
-%characters that appear in the command retain their \LaTeX\ meaning
-%when the file is loaded. It is likely however that the data file
-%may have been created by another application that is not \TeX-aware,
-%for example a spreadsheet application. For example, suppose you
-%have a file called, say, \texttt{products.csv} which looks
-%like:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Product,Cost
-%Fruit & Veg,$1.25
-%Stationary,$0.80
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This file contains two of \TeX's special characters, namely
-%"&" and \verb|$|. In this case, if you try to load the file
-%using \ics{DTLloaddb}, you will encounter errors. Instead you
-%can use:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLloadrawdb}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLloadrawdb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is the same as \ics{DTLloaddb} except that it maps nine of
-%the ten special characters onto commands that produce that
-%symbol. The only character that retains its active state is the
-%backslash character, so you will still need to check the file
-%for backslash characters. The mappings used are listed in 
-%\autoref{tab:rawmappings}. So using the file \texttt{products.csv},
-%as described above, 
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloadrawdb{mydata}{products.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%is equivalent to:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{mydata}
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Product}{Fruit \& Veg}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Cost}{\$1.25}%
-%\DTLnewrow{mydata}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Product}{Stationary}%
-%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Cost}{\$0.80}%
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Special character mappings used by \cs{DTLloadrawdb}
-%(note that the backslash retains its active state)}
-%\label{tab:rawmappings}
-%\begin{center}
-%\begin{tabular}{ll}
-%Character & Mapping\\
-%\verb|%| & \verb|\%|\\
-%\verb|$| & \verb|\$|\\
-%\verb|&| & \verb|\&|\\
-%\verb|#| & \verb|\#|\\
-%\verb|_| & \verb|\_|\\
-%\verb|{| & \verb|\{|\\
-%\verb|}| & \verb|\}|\\
-%\verb|~| & \cs{textasciitilde}\\
-%\verb|^| & \cs{textasciicircum}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{center}
-%\end{table}
-%
-%It may be that there are other characters that require mapping.
-%For example, the file \texttt{products.csv} may instead look like:\par
-%\vskip\baselineskip
-%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-%Product,Cost
-%Fruit \& Veg,\pounds1.25
-%Stationary,\pounds0.80
-%\end{ttfamily}
-%\vskip\baselineskip
-%The pound character is not an internationally standard keyboard
-%character, and does not achieve the desired effect when used
-%in a \LaTeX\ document. It will therefore be necessary to convert
-%this symbol to an appropriate control sequence. This can be done 
-%using the command:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLrawmap}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLrawmap}\marg{string}\marg{replacement}
-%\end{definition}
-%For example:\par
-%\vskip\baselineskip
-%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-%\cs{DTLrawmap}\char`\{\pounds\char`\}\char`\{\cs{pounds}\char`\}
-%\end{ttfamily}
-%\vskip\baselineskip\noindent
-%will convert all occurrences\footnote{in the \LaTeX\ database, not
-%in the data file itself!} of \texttt{\pounds} with \cs{pounds}.
-%
-%Note that the warning in the previous section about no paragraph
-%breaks in an entry also applies to entries loaded from a database.
-%If you do need a paragraph break, use \ics{DTLpar} instead of
-%\cs{par}, but remember that each row of data in an external data file
-%must not have a line break.
-%
-%\subsection{Iterating Through a Database}
-%\label{sec:dbforeach}
-%
-%Once you have created a database, either loading it from an
-%external file, as described in \autoref{sec:loaddb}, or using the
-%commands described in \autoref{sec:newdb}, you can then iterate
-%through each row of the database and access elements in that row.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLforeach}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLforeach}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{values}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This will iterate through each row of the database called
-%\meta{db name}, applying \meta{text} to each row of the database
-%where \meta{condition} is met. The argument \meta{values} is a
-%comma separated list of \meta{cmd}"="\meta{key} pairs. At the
-%start of each row, each command \meta{cmd} in the \meta{values}
-%list will be set to the value of the entry given by \meta{key}.
-%These commands may then be used in \meta{text}.
-%Note that this assignment is done globally to ensure that
-%\cs{DLTforeach} works correctly in a \env{tabular} environment.
-%Since you may want to use the same set of commands in a later
-%\cs{DTLforeach}, the commands are not checked to determine if they
-%already exist. It is therefore important that you check you 
-%are not using an existing command whose value should not be changed.
-%
-%The optional argument \meta{condition} is a condition in the
-%form allowed by \cs{ifthenelse}. This includes the commands
-%provided by the \sty{ifthen} package, as well as the commands
-%described in \autoref{sec:ifthen}. The default value of 
-%\meta{condition} is "\boolean{true}".
-%
-%\begin{example}{Student scores}{ex:scores}
-%Suppose you have a data file called \texttt{studentscores.csv} that 
-%contains the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%FirstName,Surname,StudentNo,Score
-%John,"Smith, Jr",102689,68
-%Jane,Brown,102647,75
-%Andy,Brown,103569,42
-%Z\"oe,Adams,105987,52
-%Roger,Brady,106872,58
-%Clare,Verdon,104356,45
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{John}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Smith, Jr}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{102689}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{68}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Jane}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Brown}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{102647}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{75}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Andy}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Brown}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{103569}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{42}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Z\"oe}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{52}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{105987}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Adams}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Roger}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{58}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{106872}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Brady}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Clare}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{45}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{104356}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Verdon}\relax
-%and you load the data into a database called "scores" using:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{scores}{studentscores.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%you can then display the database in a table as follows:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scores}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:scores}. (Note that since I didn't
-%need the student registration number, I didn't bother to 
-%assign a command to the key "StudentNo".)
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scores}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%The macro \ics{DTLforeach} may be nested up to three times. Each
-%level uses the corresponding counters: 
-%\counterfmt{DTLrowi},
-%\counterfmt{DTLrowii} and
-%\counterfmt{DTLrowiii} that keep track of
-%the current row. Note that these counters are only incremented
-%when \meta{condition} is satisfied. These counters are incremented
-%using \cs{refstepcounter} before the start of \meta{text}, so they
-%may be referenced using \cs{label}, however remember that \cs{label}
-%references the last counter to be incremented using 
-%\cs{refstepcounter} \emph{in the current scope}. The \cs{label}
-%should therefore be the first command in \meta{text} to ensure
-%that it references the current row counter.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLcurrentindex}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLcurrentindex}
-%\end{definition}
-%At the start of each iteration, \cs{DTLcurrentindex} is set
-%to the arabic value of the current row counter.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Student Scores---Labelling}{ex:label}
-%In the previous example, the student scores, stored in the
-%database "scores" were placed in a table. In this example the
-%table will be modified slightly to number each student according
-%to the row. Suppose I also want to identify which row Jane Brown
-%is in, and reference it in the text. The easiest way to do this
-%is to construct a label on each row which uniquely identifies
-%that student. The label can't simply be constructed from the
-%surname, as there are two students with the same surname. In order
-%to create a unique label, I can either construct a label from
-%both the surname and the first name, or I can use the student's
-%registration number, or I can use the student's score, since all
-%the scores are unique. The former method will cause a problem since
-%one of the names (Z\"oe) contains an accent command. Although
-%the registration numbers are all unique, they are not particularly
-%memorable, so I shall instead use the scores.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scoreslab}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{cllc}
-%\bfseries Row &
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\label{row:\score}\\\theDTLrowi &
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}%
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%
-%Jane Brown scored the highest (75\%), her score can be seen on 
-%row~\ref{row:75}.
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:scoreslab} and the following text:
-%Jane Brown scored the highest (75\%), her score can be seen on 
-%row~\ref*{row:75}.
-%
-%\textbf{Note:} the \cs{label} command is placed before
-%"\\" to ensure that it is in the same scope as the command
-%"\refstepcounter{DTLrowi}".
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scoreslab}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{cllc}
-%\bfseries Row &
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\label{row:\score}\\\theDTLrowi &
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsavelastrowcount}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsavelastrowcount}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command will store the value of the row counter used in
-%the last occurrence of \ics{DTLforeach} in the control sequence
-%\meta{cmd}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Filtering Rows}{ex:filter}
-%As mentioned earlier, the optional argument \meta{condition} of 
-%\ics{DTLforeach} provides a means to exclude certain rows.
-%This example uses the database defined in \autoref{ex:scores},
-%but only displays the information for students whose marks are
-%above 60. At the end of the table, \cs{DTLsavelastrowcount}
-%is used to store the number of rows in the table. (Note that
-%\cs{DTLsavelastrowcount} is outside of \ics{DTLforeach}.)
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Top Student Scores}\label{tab:topscores}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\score}{60}]{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%
-%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}%
-%\n\ students scored above 60\%.
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:topscores}. Note that in this example,
-%I could have specified the condition as "\score>60" since all
-%the scores are integers, however, as it's possible that an entry
-%may feasibly have a decimal score I have used \ics{DTLisgt} instead.
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Top Student Scores}\label{tab:topscores}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\score}{60}]{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%
-%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}\relax
-%\n\ students scored above 60\%.
-%\end{table}
-%
-%Suppose now, I only want to display the scores for students whose
-%surname begins with `B'. I can do this as follows:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (B)}\label{tab:Bscores}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\surname}{B}\and\DTLislt{\surname}{C}]{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:Bscores}.
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (B)}\label{tab:Bscores}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\surname}{B}\and\DTLislt{\surname}{C}]{scores}
-%{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%
-%\end{example}
-%
-%Within the body of \ics{DTLforeach} (i.e.\ within \meta{text})
-%the following conditionals may be used:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiffirstrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiffirstrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If the current row is the first row, then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiflastrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiflastrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If the current row is the last row, then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifoddrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifoddrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%If the current row number is an odd number, then do \meta{true part},
-%otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Stripy Tables}{ex:stripy}
-%This example uses the same database as in the previous examples.
-%It requires the \sty{colortbl} package, which provides the 
-%command \cs{rowcolor}. The command \cs{DTLifoddrow} is used
-%to produce a striped table.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{A Stripy Table}\label{tab:stripy}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llc}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\\DTLifoddrow{\rowcolor{blue}}{\rowcolor{green}}%
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}%
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:stripy}.
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{A Stripy Table}\label{tab:stripy}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llc}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\\DTLifoddrow{\rowcolor{blue}}{\rowcolor{green}}\relax
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{Two Database Rows per Tabular Row}{ex:2rows}
-%In order to save space, you may want two database rows per
-%tabular row, when displaying a database in a \env{tabular} 
-%environment. This can be accomplished using \ics{DTLifoddrow}.
-%For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Two Database Rows per Tabular Row}\label{tab:2rows}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llcllc}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%) &
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\DTLifoddrow{\\}{&}\relax
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%produces \autoref{tab:2rows}
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Two Database Rows per Tabular Row}\label{tab:2rows}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llcllc}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%) &
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\DTLifoddrow{\\}{&}\relax
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{Nested \cs{DTLforeach}}{ex:nested}
-%In this example I have a CSV file called "index.csv" which
-%contains:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%File,Temperature,NaCl,pH
-%exp25a.csv,25,4.7,0.5
-%exp25b.csv,25,4.8,1.5
-%exp30a.csv,30,5.12,4.5
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{index}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{index}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{File}{exp25a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{Temperature}{25}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{NaCl}{4.7}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{pH}{0.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{index}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{File}{exp25b.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{Temperature}{25}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{NaCl}{4.8}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{pH}{1.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{index}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{File}{exp30a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{Temperature}{30}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{NaCl}{5.12}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{pH}{4.5}\relax
-%The first column of this file contains the name of another
-%CSV file which has the results of a time to growth experiment 
-%performed at the given incubation temperature, salt concentration
-%and pH. The file "exp25a.csv" contains the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Time,Log Count
-%0,3.75
-%23,3.9
-%45,4.0
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{exp25a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp25a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Time}{0}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Log Count}{3.75}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp25a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Time}{23}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Log Count}{3.9}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp25a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Time}{45}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Log Count}{4.0}\relax
-%The file "exp25b.csv" contains the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Time,Log Count
-%0,3.6
-%60,3.8
-%120,4.0
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{exp25b.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp25b.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Time}{0}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Log Count}{3.6}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp25b.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Time}{60}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Log Count}{3.8}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp25b.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Time}{120}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Log Count}{4.0}\relax
-%The file "exp30a.csv" contains the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Time,Log Count
-%0,3.73
-%23,3.67
-%60,4.9
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{exp30a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp30a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Time}{0}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Log Count}{3.73}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp30a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Time}{23}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Log Count}{3.67}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{exp30a.csv}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Time}{60}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Log Count}{4.9}\relax
-%Suppose I now want to iterate through "index.csv", load the given
-%file, and create a table for that data. I can do this using
-%nested \ics{DTLforeach} as follows:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%% load index data file
-%\DTLloaddb{index}{index.csv}
-%
-%% iterate through index database
-%\DTLforeach{index}{\theFile=File,\theTemp=Temperature,%
-%\theNaCl=NaCl,\thepH=pH}{%
-%% load results file into database of the same name
-%\DTLloaddb{\theFile}{\theFile}%
-%% Create a table
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Temperature = \theTemp, NaCl = \theNaCl,
-%pH = \thepH}\label{tab:\theFile}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{rl}
-%\bfseries Time & \bfseries Log Count
-%\DTLforeach{\theFile}{\theTime=Time,\theLogCount=Log Count}{%
-%\\\theTime & \theLogCount}%
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This creates \autoref{tab:exp25a.csv} to \autoref{tab:exp30a.csv}.
-%(Note that each table is given a label that is based on the
-%database name, to ensure that it is unique.)
-%
-%\DTLforeach{index}{\theFile=File,\theTemp=Temperature,\theNaCl
-%=NaCl,\thepH=pH}{
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Temperature = \theTemp, NaCl = \theNaCl,
-%pH = \thepH}\label{tab:\theFile}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{rl}
-%\bfseries Time & \bfseries Log Count
-%\DTLforeach{\theFile}{\theTime=Time,\theLogCount=Log Count}{
-%\\\theTime & \theLogCount}%
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Editing Database Rows}
-%
-%In the body of the \ics{DTLforeach} loop, you can use the following
-%to edit the current row:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLappendtorow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLappendtorow}\marg{key}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-%This appends a new entry with the given \meta{key} and \meta{value}
-%to the current row.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLreplaceentryforrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLreplaceentryforrow}\marg{key}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-%This replaces the entry for \meta{key} with \meta{value}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLremoveentryfromrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLremoveentryfromrow}\marg{key}
-%\end{definition}
-%This the entry for \meta{key} from the current row.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLremovecurrentrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLremovecurrentrow}
-%\end{definition}
-%This removes the current row from the database.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLforeachkeyinrow}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLforeachkeyinrow}\marg{cmd}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This iterates through each key in the current row, assigns
-%\meta{cmd} to the value of that key, and does \meta{text}.
-%(\meta{cmd} must be a control sequence.)
-%
-%\begin{example}{Editing Database Rows}{ex:editdb}
-%In this example I have a CSV file called "marks.csv" that contains
-%student marks for three assignments:
-%\DTLnewdb{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{John}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Smith, Jr}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{102689}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{68}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{57}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{72}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Jane}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Brown}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{102647}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{75}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{84}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{80}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Andy}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Brown}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{103569}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{42}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{52}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{54}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Z\"oe}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Adams}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{105987}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{52}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{48}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{57}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Roger}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Brady}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{106872}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{58}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{60}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{62}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Clare}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Verdon}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{104356}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{45}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{50}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{48}\relax
-%\begin{ttfamily}\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\par
-%Surname,FirstName,StudentNo,Assignment 1,Assignment 2,Assignment 3
-%
-%\DTLforeach{marks}{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\regNo
-%=StudentNo,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII
-%=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3}{\relax
-%\surname,\firstname,\regNo,\assignI,\assignII\assignIII\par
-%}
-%\end{ttfamily}\par\noindent
-%First load this into a database called "marks":
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{marks}{marks.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Suppose now I want to compute the average mark for each
-%student, and append this to the database. I can do this as 
-%follows:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLforeach{marks}{%
-%\assignI=Assignment 1,%
-%\assignII=Assignment 2,%
-%\assignIII=Assignment 3}{%
-%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}%
-%\DTLappendtorow{Average}{\theMean}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLforeach{marks}{\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII
-%=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3}{\relax
-%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}%
-%\DTLappendtorow{Average}{\theMean}}\relax
-%For each row in the "marks" database, I now have an extra key
-%called "Average" that contains the average mark over all three
-%assignments for a given student. I can now put this data into
-%a table:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Marks}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llrrrr}
-%\bfseries Surname & \bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Assign 1 &
-%\bfseries Assign 2 &
-%\bfseries Assign 3 &
-%\bfseries Average Mark%
-%\DTLforeach{marks}{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\average
-%=Average,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII
-%=Assignment 3}{\\\surname
-%& \firstname & \assignI & \assignII & \assignIII &
-%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}\average}\relax
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:meanmarks}.
-%
-%Note that if I only wanted the averages for the table and nothing
-%else, I could simply have computed the average in each row of the
-%table and displayed it without adding the information to the
-%database, however I am going to reuse this information in
-%\autoref{ex:multibar}, so adding it to the database means that
-%I don't need to recompute the mean.
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Marks}\label{tab:meanmarks}
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{llrrrr}
-%\bfseries Surname & \bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Assign 1 &
-%\bfseries Assign 2 &
-%\bfseries Assign 3 &
-%\bfseries Average Mark\relax
-%\DTLforeach{marks}{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\average
-%=Average,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII
-%=Assignment 3}{\\\surname
-%& \firstname & \assignI & \assignII & \assignIII &
-%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}\average}\relax
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Arithmetical Computations on Database Entries}
-%
-%The commands used in \autoref{sec:fp} can be used on database
-%entries. You can, of course, directly use the commands provided
-%by the \sty{fp} package if you know that the values are in the
-%correct format (i.e.\ no currency symbols, no number group 
-%separators and a full stop as the decimal point) but if this may
-%not be the case, then you should use the commands described in
-%\autoref{sec:fp}. If you want to use a command provided by the
-%\sty{fp} package, that does not have a wrapper function in 
-%\sty{datatool}, then you will need to convert the value using
-%\ics{DTLconverttodecimal}, and convert it back using either
-%\ics{DTLdecimaltolocale} or \ics{DTLdecimaltocurrency}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Arithmetical Computations}{ex:mean}
-%In this example, I am going to produce a table similar to
-%\autoref{tab:scores}, except that I want to add an extra row at the
-%end which contains the average score.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (Including Average)}\label{tab:mean}
-%\centering
-%\def\total{0}%
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname &
-%\DTLgadd{\total}{\score}{\total}%
-%\score
-%}\\
-%\multicolumn{2}{l}{\bfseries Average Score} &
-%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}%
-%\DTLdiv{\average}{\total}{\n}%
-%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}%
-%\average
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:mean}.
-%\textbf{Notes:}
-%\begin{itemize}
-%\item I had to use \ics{DTLgadd} rather than \ics{DTLadd} since it
-%occurs within a \env{tabular} environment which puts each entry
-%in a local scope.
-%
-%\item I used \ics{DTLsavelastrowcount} to store the number of
-%rows produced by \ics{DTLforeach} in the control sequence \cs{n}.
-%
-%\item I used \ics{DTLround} to round the average score to 2 decimal
-%places.
-%\end{itemize}
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (Including Average)}\label{tab:mean}
-%\centering
-%\def\total{0}\relax
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname &
-%\DTLgadd{\total}{\score}{\total}\relax
-%\score
-%}\\
-%\multicolumn{2}{l}{\bfseries Average Score} &
-%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}\relax
-%\DTLdiv{\average}{\total}{\n}\relax
-%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}\relax
-%\average
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsumforkeys}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsumforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command sums all the entries over all the databases listed in 
-%the comma separated list of database names \meta{db list} for each key in
-%\meta{key list} where the condition given by
-%\meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd} 
-%which must be a control sequence. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsumforkeys{scores}{Score}{\total}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%sets \cs{total} to the sum of all the scores in the database
-%called "scores".
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmeanforkeys}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmeanforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command computes the arithmetic mean of all the entries over
-%all the databases listed in \meta{db list} for all keys in \meta{key list} where 
-%the condition
-%given by \meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd}
-%which must be a control sequence. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLmeanforkeys{scores}{Score}{\average}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%sets \cs{average} to the mean of all the scores in the database
-%called "scores".
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLvarianceforkeys}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLvarianceforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command computes the variance of all the entries over
-%all the databases listed in \meta{db list} for all keys in \meta{key list} where 
-%the condition
-%given by \meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd}
-%which must be a control sequence.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsdforkeys}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsdforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command computes the standard deviation of all the entries over
-%all the databases listed in \meta{db list} for all keys in \meta{key list} where 
-%the condition
-%given by \meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd}
-%which must be a control sequence.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminforkeys}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLminforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command determines the minimum value over all entries
-%for all keys in \meta{key list} over all the databases listed in \meta{db list} 
-%and stores
-%in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLminforkeys{scores}{Score}{\theMin}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%sets \cs{theMin} to the minimum score in the database.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmaxforkeys}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmaxforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command determines the maximum value over all entries
-%for all keys in \meta{key list} over all the databases listed in \meta{db list} 
-%and stores
-%in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLminforkeys{scores}{Score}{\theMax}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%sets \cs{theMax} to the minimum score in the database.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLcomputebounds}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLcomputebounds}\marg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{x key}\marg{y key}\marg{minX cmd}\marg{minY cmd}\marg{maxX cmd}\marg{maxY cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%Computes the maximum and minimum $x$ and $y$ values over all
-%the databases listed in \meta{db list} where the $x$ value
-%is given by \meta{x key} and the $y$ value is given by
-%\meta{y key}. The results are stored in \meta{minX cmd},
-%\meta{minY cmd}, \meta{maxX cmd} and \meta{maxY cmd}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Mail Merging}{ex:mailmerging}
-%This example uses the database given in \autoref{ex:scores} and
-%uses \ics{DTLmeanforkey} to determine the average score. A letter
-%is then created for each student to inform them of their score
-%and the class average.
-%
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\documentclass{letter}
-%
-%\usepackage{datatool}
-%
-%\begin{document}
-%% load database
-%\DTLloaddb{scores}{studentscores.csv}
-%% compute arithmetic mean for key `Score'
-%\DTLmeanforkey{scores}{Score}{\average}
-%% Round the average to 2 decimal places
-%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}
-%% Save the highest score in \maxscore
-%\DTLmaxforkey{scores}{Score}{\maxscore}
-%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,%
-%\score=Score}{%
-%\begin{letter}{}
-%\opening{Dear \firstname\ \surname}
-%
-%\DTLifnumgt{\score}{60}{Congratulations you}{You} achieved a score
-%of \score\% which was \DTLifnumgt{\score}{\average}{above}{below}
-%the average of \average\%. \DTLifnumeq{\score}{\maxscore}{You
-%achieved the highest score}{The top score was \maxscore}.
-%
-%\closing{Yours Sincerely}
-%\end{letter}
-%}
-%\end{document}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Sorting a Database}
-%\label{sec:sort}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsort}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsort}\marg{sort criteria}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-%This will sort the database called \meta{db name} according to
-%the criteria given by \meta{sort criteria}, which must be a 
-%comma separated list of keys and optionally "="\meta{order}, where
-%\meta{order} is either "ascending" or "descending". If the order
-%is omitted, "ascending" is assumed. The database keeps track of
-%the data type for a given key, and uses this to determine whether
-%an alphabetical or numerical sort is required.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Sorting a Database}{ex:sort}
-%This example uses the database called "scores" defined in 
-%\autoref{ex:scores}. First, I am going to sort the database
-%according to the student scores in descending order (highest to
-%lowest) and display the database in a table
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Score)}\label{tab:sortscores}
-%\centering
-%\DTLsort{Score=descending}{scores}%
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:sortscores}.
-%
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Score)}\label{tab:sortscores}
-%\centering
-%\DTLsort{Score=descending}{scores}\relax
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\
-%\firstname & \surname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%
-%Now I am going to sort the database according to 
-%surname and then first name, and display it in a table. Note that
-%since I want to sort in ascending order, I can omit the
-%"=ascending" part of the sort criteria. I have also decided to
-%reverse the first and second columns, so that the surname is
-%in the first column.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Name)}\label{tab:sortname}
-%\centering
-%\DTLsort{Surname,FirstName}{scores}%
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)%
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{%
-%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{%
-%\\
-%\surname & \firstname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{tab:sortname}.
-%\begin{table}[htbp]
-%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Name)}\label{tab:sortname}
-%\centering
-%\DTLsort{Surname,FirstName}{scores}\relax
-%\begin{tabular}{llr}
-%\bfseries Surname &
-%\bfseries First Name &
-%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax
-%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax
-%\\
-%\surname & \firstname & \score}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{table}
-%
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Saving a Database to an External File}
-%\label{sec:savedb}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsavedb}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsavedb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-%This writes the database called \meta{db name} to a file called
-%\meta{filename}. The separator and delimiter characters used
-%are as given by \ics{DTLsetseparator} (or \ics{DTLsettabseparator})
-%and \ics{DTLsetdelimiter}. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLsettabdelimiter
-%\DTLsavedb{scores}{scores.txt}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsavetexdb}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsavetexdb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-%This writes the database called \meta{db name} to a \LaTeX\ file 
-%called \meta{filename}, where the database is stored as 
-%a combination of \ics{DTLnewdb}, \ics{DTLnewrow} and \ics{DTLnewdbentry} commands.
-%
-%\section{Pie Charts (\texorpdfstring{\sty{datapie}}{datapie} package)}
-%
-%The \sty{datapie} package is not loaded by the \sty{datatool} package,
-%so you need to load \sty{datapie} if you want to use any of the
-%commands defined in this section. You will need to have the
-%\sty{pgf}/\sty{tikz} packages installed. The \sty{datapie} package 
-%may be given the following options:
-%\begin{description}
-%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{color}}] Colour option (default.)
-%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{monochrome}}] Monochrome option.
-%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateinner}}] 
-%Rotate inner labels so that they are aligned
-%with the pie chart radial axis.
-%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{norotateinner}}] 
-%Don't rotate inner labels (default.)
-%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateouter}}] 
-%Rotate outer labels so that they are aligned
-%with the pie chart radial axis.
-%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{norotateouter}}] 
-%Don't rotate outer labels (default.)
-%\end{description}
-%
-%Numerical information contained in a database created by the
-%\sty{datatool} package can be converted into a pie chart using
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpiechart}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpiechart}\oarg{condition}\marg{settings list}\marg{db name}\marg{values}
-%\end{definition}\noindent
-%where \meta{db name} is the name of the database, and 
-%\meta{condition} has the same form as the optional argument 
-%to \ics{DTLforeach} described in \autoref{sec:dbforeach}. If 
-%\meta{condition} is false, that information is omitted from the
-%construction of the pie chart. The argument \meta{values} is a
-%comma separated list of \meta{cmd}"="\meta{key} pairs, the same
-%as that required by the penultimate argument of \ics{DTLforeach}.
-%The \meta{settings list} is a comma separated list of 
-%\meta{setting}=\meta{value} pairs, where \meta{setting} can be any of
-%the following:
-%\begin{description}
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{variable}] 
-%This specifies the control sequence to use that 
-%contains the value used to construct the pie chart. The control
-%sequence must be one of the control sequences to appear in
-%the assignment list \meta{values}. This setting is required.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{start}] 
-%This is the starting angle of the first segment. The
-%value is 0 by default.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{radius}] 
-%This is the radius of the pie chart. The default value
-%is 2cm.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{innerratio}] 
-%The distance from the centre of the
-%pie chart to the point where the inner labels are placed is given
-%by this value multiplied by the ratio. The default value is 0.5. 
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{outerratio}]
-%The distance from the centre of the
-%pie chart to the point where the outer labels are placed is given
-%by this value multiplied by the ratio. The default value is 1.25.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayratio}]
-%The distance from the centre of the pie chart
-%to the point of cutaway segments is given by this value multiplied
-%by the ratio. The default value is 0.2.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset}] 
-%This is the absolute distance from the centre
-%of the pie chart to the point where the inner labels are placed.
-%You should use only one or other of \setting{DTLpiechart}{innerratio}
-%and \setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset}, not both. If you also want to 
-%specify the radius, you must use \setting{DTLpiechart}{ratio}
-%before \setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset}. If omitted, the inner 
-%offset is obtained from the ratio multiplied by the 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{innerratio} value.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset}] 
-%This is the absolute distance from the centre
-%of the pie chart to the point where the outer labels are placed.
-%You should use only one or other of \setting{DTLpiechart}{outerratio} 
-%and \setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset}, not both. If you also want to 
-%specify the radius, you must use \setting{DTLpiechart}{ratio}
-%before \setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset}. If omitted, the outer 
-%offset is obtained from the ratio multiplied by the 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{outerratio} value.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset}] 
-%This is the absolute distance from the centre of
-%the pie chart to the point of the cutaway segments.  You should use
-%only one or other of \setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayratio} and 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset}, not both. If
-%you also want to specify the radius, you must use 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{ratio} before 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset}. If omitted, the cutaway offset 
-%is obtained from the ratio multiplied by the 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayratio} value.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutaway}] 
-%This is a list of cutaway segments. This should be
-%a comma separated list of individual numbers, or number ranges
-%(separated by a dash.) For example "cutaway={1,3}" will separate
-%the first and third segments from the rest of the pie chart, offset
-%by the value of the \setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset} setting, 
-%whereas "cutaway={1-3}" will separate the
-%first three segments from the rest of the pie chart. If omitted,
-%the pie chart will be whole.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{innerlabel}] 
-%The value of this is positioned in the middle of each segment at a 
-%distance of \setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset} from the centre
-%of the pie chart. The default is the same as the value of 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{variable}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{outerlabel}] 
-%The value of this is positioned at a distance of 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset} from the centre of the pie chart. 
-%The default is empty.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{rotateinner}] This is a boolean setting, 
-%so it can only take the values "true" and "false". If the value is 
-%omitted "true" is assumed. If true, the inner labels are rotated 
-%along the spokes of the pie chart, otherwise the inner labels are not 
-%rotated.  There are analogous package options 
-%\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateinner} and \pkgopt[datapie]{norotateinner}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{rotateouter}] 
-%This is a boolean setting, so it can only take
-%the values "true" and "false". If the value is omitted "true" is
-%assumed. If true, the outer labels are rotated along the spokes of
-%the pie chart, otherwise the outer labels are not rotated.
-%There are analogous package options 
-%\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateouter} and \pkgopt[datapie]{norotateouter}.
-%
-%\end{description}
-%
-%\begin{example}{A Pie Chart}{ex:piechart}
-%This example loads data from a file called "fruit.csv" which contains
-%the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Name,Quantity
-%"Apples",30
-%"Pears",25
-%"Lemons,Limes",40.5
-%"Peaches",34.5
-%"Cherries",20
-%\end{verbatim}
-%First load the data:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{fruit}{fruit.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{fruit}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Apples}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{30}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Pears}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{25}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Lemons,Limes}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{40.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Peaches}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{34.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Cherries}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{20}\relax
-%Now create a pie chart in a figure:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This creates \autoref{fig:piechart}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart}
-%\label{fig:piechart}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%There are no outer labels by default, but they can be set
-%using the \setting{DTLpiechart}{outerlabel} setting. 
-%The following sets the outer label to the value of the "Name" key:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Outer labels set)}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This creates \autoref{fig:piechartouter}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name}{fruit}
-%{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Outer labels set)}
-%\label{fig:piechartouter}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%You may prefer the labels to be rotated. The following
-%switches on the rotation for the inner and outer labels:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,%
-%rotateinner,rotateouter}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Rotation enabled)}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This creates \autoref{fig:piechartrot}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name
-%,rotateinner,rotateouter}{fruit}
-%{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Rotation enabled)}
-%\label{fig:piechartrot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{Separating Segments from the Pie Chart}{ex:cutaway}
-%You may want to separate one or more segments from the pie chart,
-%perhaps to emphasize them. You can do this using the 
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutaway}
-%setting. The following separates the first and third segments
-%from the pie chart:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,%
-%cutaway={1,3}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:piecutaway}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name
-%,cutaway={1,3}}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments}
-%\label{fig:piecutaway}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%Alternatively I can specify a range of segments. The following
-%separates the first two segments:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,%
-%cutaway={1-2}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1-2\}})}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:piecutaway2}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name
-%,cutaway={1-2}}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1-2\}})}
-%\label{fig:piecutaway2}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%Notice the difference between \autoref{fig:piecutaway2} and
-%\autoref{fig:piecutaway3} which was produced using:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,%
-%cutaway={1,2}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1,2\}})}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name
-%,cutaway={1,2}}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1,2\}})}
-%\label{fig:piecutaway3}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Pie Chart Variables}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpievariable}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpievariable}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command is set to the variable given by the
-%\setting{DTLpiechart}{variable} setting in the \meta{settings list}
-%argument of \cs{DTLpiechart}. The \setting{DTLpiechart}{innerlabel}
-%is set to \cs{DTLpievariable} by default.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpiepercent}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpiepercent}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command is set to the percentage value of \cs{DTLpievariable}.
-%The percentage value is rounded to \meta{n} digits, where \meta{n}
-%is the value of the \LaTeX\ counter 
-%\counterfmt{DTLpieroundvar}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Changing the Inner and Outer Labels}{ex:pielabels}
-%This example uses the database defined in \autoref{ex:piechart}.
-%The inner label is now set to the percentage value, rather than
-%the actual value, and the outer label is set to the name with
-%the actual value in parentheses.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,%
-%innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent\%},%
-%outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the labels)}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:piechartlabels}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent
-%\%},outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the labels)}
-%\label{fig:piechartlabels}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Pie Chart Label Formatting}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayinnerlabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs how the inner label is formatted, where \meta{text}
-%is the text of the inner label. The default is to just do \meta{text}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayouterlabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs how the outer label is formatted, where \meta{text}
-%is the text of the outer label. The default is to just do \meta{text}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Changing the Inner and Outer Label 
-%Format}{ex:pielabelformat}
-%This example extends \autoref{ex:pielabels}.
-%The inner and outer labels are now both typeset in a sans-serif
-%font:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,%
-%innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent\%},%
-%outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the label format)}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:piechartlabelformat}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent
-%\%},outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the label format)}
-%\label{fig:piechartlabelformat}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Pie Chart Colours}
-%
-%The \sty{datapie} package predefines colours for the first 
-%eight segments of the pie chart. If you require more than 
-%eight segments, you will need to use
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color}
-%\end{definition}\noindent
-%to set the colours for any additional segments, or you can use
-%it to change the default colours. The first argument \meta{n}
-%is the segment index (starting from 1), and the second argument
-%\meta{color} is a colour specifier as used in commands such as
-%\cs{color}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdopiesegmentcolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdopiesegmentcolor}\meta{n}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the current text colour to that of the \meta{n}th
-%segment.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the current text colour to that of the current pie
-%segment. This command may only be used within a pie chart, or
-%within the body of \ics{DTLforeach}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieoutlinecolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpieoutlinecolor}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the outline colour for the pie chart. The default is
-%black.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieoutlinewidth}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpieoutlinewidth}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is a length that governs the line width of the outline. The
-%default value is 0pt, but can be changed using \cs{setlength}.
-%The outline is only drawn if \cs{DTLpieoutlinewidth} is greater
-%than 0pt.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Pie Segment Colours}{ex:piecolours}
-%This example extends \autoref{ex:pielabelformat}.
-%It sets the outline thickness to 2pt, and
-%the outer label is now set in the same colour as the fill colour 
-%of the segment to which it belongs. 
-%In addition, a legend is created using
-%\ics{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\setlength{\DTLpieoutlinewidth}{2pt}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{%
-%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor
-%\textsf{\shortstack{#1}}}
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,%
-%innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent\%},%
-%outerlabel={\name\\(\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\begin{tabular}[b]{ll}
-%\DTLforeach{fruit}{\name=Name}{\DTLiffirstrow{}{\\}%
-%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor\rule{10pt}{10pt} &
-%\name
-%}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Using Segment Colours and Outline)}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:piesegcolour}. (The format of the
-%outer label has been changed to use \cs{shortstack} to 
-%prevent the outer labels from taking up so much horizontal
-%space. The \setting{DTLpiechart}{outerlabel} setting has also been 
-%modified to use "\\" after the name to move the percentage value onto
-%the next row.)
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\setlength{\DTLpieoutlinewidth}{2pt}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{\relax
-%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor
-%\textsf{\shortstack{#1}}}
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent
-%\%},outerlabel={\name\\(\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\begin{tabular}[b]{ll}
-%\DTLforeach{fruit}{\name=Name}{\DTLiffirstrow{}{\\}\relax
-%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor\rule{10pt}{10pt} &
-%\name
-%}
-%\end{tabular}
-%\caption{A Pie Chart (Using Segment Colours and Outline)}
-%\label{fig:piesegcolour}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Adding Extra Commands Before and After the Pie Chart}
-%
-%The pie charts created using \ics{DTLpiechart} are placed inside
-%a \env{tikzpicture} environment (defined by the \sty{tikz} package.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieatbegintikz}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpieatbegintikz}
-%\end{definition}
-%The macro \cs{DTLpieatbegintikz} is called at the start of the
-%\env{tikzpicture} environment, allowing you to change the
-%\env{tikzpicture} settings. By default \cs{DTLpieatbegintikz}
-%does nothing, but you can redefine it to, say, scale the pie
-%chart.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieatendtikz}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLpieatendtikz}
-%\end{definition}
-%The macro \cs{DTLpieatendtikz} is called at the end of the
-%\env{tikzpicture} environment, allowing you add additional
-%graphics to the pie chart. This does nothing by default.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Adding Information to the Pie Chart}{ex:piescale}
-%This example modifies \autoref{ex:piechart}. It redefines
-%\cs{DTLpieatendtikz} to add an annotated arrow.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{%
-%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{An Annotated Pie Chart}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:pieannote}. (Note that the centre
-%of the pie chart is the origin of the TikZ picture.)
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLpieatendtikz}{%
-%\draw[<-] (45:1.5cm) -- (40:2.5cm)node[right]{Apples};}
-%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{An Annotated Pie Chart}
-%\label{fig:pieannote}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\section{Scatter and Line Plots (\texorpdfstring{\sty{dataplot}}{dataplot}
-%package)}
-%
-%The \sty{dataplot} package provides commands for creating
-%scatter or line plots from databases. It uses the pgf/TikZ plot 
-%handler library to create the plots. See the \sty{pgf} manual for
-%more detail on pgf streams and plot handles. The \sty{dataplot}
-%package is not loaded by \sty{datatool} so if you want to use
-%it you need to load it explicitly using "\usepackage{dataplot}".
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplot}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplot}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{settings}
-%\end{definition}
-%This command creates a plot (inside a \env{tikzpicture} environment)
-%of all the data given in the databases listed in \meta{db list},
-%which should be a comma separated list of database names.
-%The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that for
-%\ics{DTLforeach}. The \meta{settings} argument is a comma separated
-%list of \meta{setting}"="\meta{value} pairs. There are two settings
-%that must be specified \setting{DTLplot}{x} and \setting{DTLplot}{y}.
-%The other settings are optional. Note that any value that contains
-%a comma, must be enclosed in braces. For example
-%"colors={red,cyan,blue}". Note where any setting requires
-%a number, or list of numbers (such as \setting{DTLplot}{bounds})
-%the number must be supplied in standard decimal notation (i.e.\
-%no currency, no number groups, and a full stop as the decimal
-%point.) Available settings are as follows:
-%\begin{description}
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{x}] The database key
-%that specifies the $x$ co-ordinates. This setting is required.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{y}] The database key that specifies
-%the $y$ co-ordinates. This setting is required.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{markcolors}] A comma separated list of colour
-%names for the markers. An empty value will use the current colour.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{linecolors}] A comma separated list of colour
-%names for the plot lines. An empty value will use the current colour.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{colors}] A comma separated list of colour
-%names for the lines and markers.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{marks}] A comma separated list of 
-%code to generate plot marks. (This should typically be a list
-%of \cs{pgfuseplotmark} commands, see the \sty{pgf} manual for
-%further details.) You may use \cs{relax} as an element
-%of the list to suppress markers for the corresponding plot.
-%For example: "marks={\pgfuseplotmark{o},\relax}" will use an
-%open circle marker for the first database, and no markers for the
-%second database listed in \meta{db list}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{lines}] A comma separated list of 
-%line style settings. (This should typically be a list of 
-%\cs{pgfsetdash} commands, see the \sty{pgf} manual for
-%further details on how to set the line style.) An empty value 
-%will use the current line style.
-%You may use \cs{relax} as an element
-%of the list to suppress line for the corresponding plot.
-%For example: "lines={\relax,\pgfsetdash{}{0pt}}"
-%will have no lines for the first database, and a solid line
-%for the second database listed in \meta{db list}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{width}] The width of the plot. This must
-%be a length. The plot width does not include outer tick marks or
-%labels.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{height}] The height of the plot. This must
-%be a length. The plot height does not include outer tick marks
-%or labels.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{style}] This setting governs whether
-%to use lines or markers in the plot, and may take one of
-%the following values: "both" (lines and markers), 
-%"lines" (only lines) or "markers" (only markers.) The default is
-%"markers".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{axes}] This setting governs whether
-%to display the axes, and may take one of
-%the following values: "both", "x", "y" or "none". If no value
-%is specified, "both" is assumed.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{box}] This setting governs whether
-%or not to surround the plot in a box. It is a boolean setting,
-%taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is
-%specified, "true" is assumed.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xtics}] This setting governs whether
-%or not to display the $x$ tick marks. It is a boolean setting,
-%taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is
-%specified "true" is assumed. If the \setting{DTLplot}{axes}
-%setting is set to "both" or "x", this value will automatically
-%be set to "true", otherwise it will be set to "false".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{ytics}] This setting governs whether
-%or not to display the $y$ ticks. It is a boolean setting,
-%taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is
-%specified "true" is assumed. If the \setting{DTLplot}{axes}
-%setting is set to "both" or "y", this value will automatically
-%be set to "true", otherwise it will be set to "false".
-%
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xminortics}] This setting governs whether
-%or not to display the $x$ minor tick marks. It is a boolean 
-%setting, taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is
-%specified "true" is assumed. This setting also sets the
-%$x$ major tick marks on if the value is "true".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yminortics}] This setting governs whether
-%or not to display the $y$ minor tick marks. It is a boolean 
-%setting, taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is
-%specified "true" is assumed. This setting also sets the
-%$y$ major tick marks on if the value is "true".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticdir}] This sets the $x$ tick direction,
-%and may only take the values "in" or "out".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticdir}] This sets the $y$ tick direction,
-%and may only take the values "in" or "out".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{ticdir}] This sets the $x$ and $y$ tick 
-%direction, and may only take the values "in" or "out".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{bounds}] The value must be in the form
-%\meta{min x}","\meta{min y}","\meta{max x}","\meta{max y}. This
-%sets the graph bounds to the given values. If omitted the
-%bounds are computed from the maximum and minimum values of the
-%data. For example
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLplot{data1,data2}{x=Height,y=Weight,bounds={0,0,10,20}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Note that the \setting{DTLplot}{bounds} setting overrides
-%the \setting{DTLplot}{minx}, \setting{DTLplot}{maxx},
-%\setting{DTLplot}{miny} and \setting{DTLplot}{maxy} settings.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{minx}] The value is the minimum value
-%of the $x$ axis.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{miny}] The value is the minimum value
-%of the $y$ axis.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{maxx}] The value is the maximum value
-%of the $x$ axis.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{maxy}] The value is the maximum value
-%of the $y$ axis.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticpoints}] The value must be a comma
-%separated list of decimal numbers indicating where to put the
-%$x$ tick marks. If omitted, the $x$ tick marks are placed at 
-%equal intervals along the $x$ axis such that each interval is
-%not less than the length given by \ics{DTLmintickgap}.
-%This setting overrides \setting{DTLplot}{xticgap}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticgap}] This value specifies the
-%gap between the $x$ tick marks.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticpoints}] The value must be a comma
-%separated list of decimal numbers indicating where to put the
-%$y$ tick marks. If omitted, the $y$ tick marks are placed at 
-%equal intervals along the $y$ axis such that each interval is
-%not less than the length given by \ics{DTLmintickgap}.
-%This setting overrides \setting{DTLplot}{yticgap}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticgap}] This value specifies the
-%gap between the $y$ tick marks.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{grid}] This is a boolean value that
-%specifies whether or not to display the grid. If no value
-%is given, "true" is assumed. The minor grid lines are only
-%displayed if the minor tick marks are set.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticlabels}] The value must be a comma
-%separated list of labels for each $x$ tick mark. If omitted,
-%the labels are the value of the $x$ tick position, rounded 
-%\meta{n} digits after the decimal point, where \meta{n} is 
-%given by the value of the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticlabels}] The value must be a comma
-%separated list of labels for each $y$ tick mark. If omitted,
-%the labels are the value of the $y$ tick position, rounded 
-%\meta{n} digits after the decimal point, where \meta{n} is 
-%given by the value of the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xlabel}] The value is the label for
-%the $x$ axis. If omitted, the axis has no label.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{ylabel}] The value is the label for
-%the $y$ axis. If omitted, the axis has no label.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{legend}] This setting governs whether
-%or not to display the legend, and where it should be displayed.
-%It may take one of the following values "none" (don't display
-%the legend), "north", "northeast", "east", "southeast", "south",
-%"southwest", "west" or "northwest". If the value is omitted,
-%"northeast" is assumed.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{legendlabels}] The value must be a comma
-%separated list of labels for the legend. If omitted, the database
-%names are used.
-%
-%\end{description}
-%
-%\begin{example}{A Basic Graph}{ex:basicplot}
-%Suppose you have a file called "groupa.csv" that contains the 
-%following:
-%\DTLnewdb{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.55}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{45.4}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.54}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{48.0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.56}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{58.0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.56}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{50.2}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.57}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{46.0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.58}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{48.3}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.59}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{56.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.59}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{58.1}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.60}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{60.9}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.62}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{56.3}\relax
-%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-%Height,Weight
-%\DTLforeach{groupa}{\x=Height,\y=Weight}{\x,\y
-%}\end{ttfamily}\par\noindent
-%First load this into a database called "groupa":
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{groupa}{groupa.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%The data can now be converted into a scatter plot as follows:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:basicplot}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\label{fig:basicplot}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%Alternatively, you can use the \setting{DTLplot}{style} setting
-%to change it into a line plot:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight,style=lines}
-%\caption{A Line Plot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:basiclineplot}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight,style=lines}
-%\caption{A Line Plot}
-%\label{fig:basiclineplot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{Plotting Multiple Data Sets}{ex:2db}
-%In this example, I shall use the database called "groupa" defined
-%in \autoref{ex:basicplot}, and another database called "groupb"
-%which is loaded from the file "groupb.csv" which contains the
-%following:
-%\DTLnewdb{groupb}
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.54}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{48.4}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.54}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{42.0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.55}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{64.0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.56}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{58.2}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.56}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{49.0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.57}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{40.3}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.58}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{51.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.58}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{63.1}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.59}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{74.9}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.59}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{59.3}\relax
-%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-%Height,Weight
-%\DTLforeach{groupb}{\x=Height,\y=Weight}{\x,\y
-%}\end{ttfamily}\par\noindent
-%First load this into a database called "groupb":
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{groupb}{groupb.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%I can now plot both groups in the same graph, but I want a smaller
-%graph than \autoref{fig:basicplot} and \autoref{fig:basiclineplot}, 
-%so I am going to set the plot width and height to 3in:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,width=3in,height=3in}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:2db}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,width=3in,height=3in}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\label{fig:2db}
-%
-%Now let's add a legend using the \setting{DTLplot}{legend} setting, 
-%with the legend labels "Group A" and "Group B",
-%and set the $x$ tick intervals using \setting{DTLplot}{xticpoints}
-%setting. I am also going to set the $x$ axis label to
-%"Height (m)" and the $y$ axis label to "Weight (kg)", and place
-%a box around the plot.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,
-%width=3in,height=3in,legend,legendlabels={Group A,Group B},
-%xlabel={Height (m)},ylabel={Weight (kg)},box,
-%xticpoints={1.54,1.55,1.56,1.57,1.58,1.59,1.60,1.61,1.62}}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:legend}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,legend,
-%width=3in,height=3in,legendlabels={Group A,Group B},
-%xlabel={Height (m)},ylabel={Weight (kg)},box,
-%xticpoints={1.54,1.55,1.56,1.57,1.58,1.59,1.60,1.61,1.62}}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\label{fig:legend}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Adding Information to the Plot}
-%
-%The \sty{datatool} package provides two hooks used at the beginning
-%and end of the \env{tikzpicture} environment:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotatbegintikz}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotatbegintikz}
-%\end{definition}\noindent
-%and
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotatendtikz}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotatendtikz}
-%\end{definition}
-%They are both defined to do nothing by default, but can be redefined
-%to add commands to the image. The unit vectors are set prior to
-%using these hooks, so you can use the same co-ordinates as those
-%in the data sets.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLaddtoplotlegend}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLaddtoplotlegend}\marg{marker}\marg{line style}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This adds a new row to the plot legend where \meta{marker} is
-%code to produce the marker, \meta{line style} is code to set
-%the line style and \meta{text} is a textual label. You can
-%use \cs{relax} to suppress the marker or line. For example:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLaddtoplotlegend{\pgfuseplotmark{x}}{\relax}{Some Data}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Note that the legend is plotted before \cs{DTLplotatendtikz},
-%so if you want to add information to the legend you will need
-%to do the in \cs{DTLplotatstarttikz}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Adding Information to a Plot}{ex:addtoplot}
-%Returning to the plots created in \autoref{ex:2db}, suppose
-%I now want to annotate the plot, say I want to draw your notice
-%to a particular point, say the point (1.58,48.3), then I can
-%redefine \cs{DTLplotatendtikz} to draw an annotated arrow to
-%that point:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatendtikz}{%
-%\draw[<-,line width=1pt] (1.58,48.3) -- (1.6,43)
-% node[below]{interesting point};
-%}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%So \autoref{fig:legend} now looks like \autoref{fig:annote}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatendtikz}{%
-%\draw[<-,line width=1pt] (1.58,48.3) -- (1.6,43)
-% node[below]{interesting point};
-%}
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,legend,
-%width=3in,height=3in,legendlabels={Group A,Group B},box,
-%xlabel={Height (m)},ylabel={Weight (kg)},
-%xticpoints={1.54,1.55,1.56,1.57,1.58,1.59,1.60,1.61,1.62}}
-%\caption{A Scatter Plot}
-%\label{fig:annote}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Global Plot Settings}
-%
-%\subsubsection{Lengths}
-%This section describes the lengths that govern the appearance of
-%the plot created using \ics{DTLplot}. These lengths can be
-%changed using \cs{setlength}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotwidth}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotwidth}
-%\end{definition}
-%This length governs the length of the $x$ axis. Note that the plot
-%width does not include any outer tick marks or labels. The default
-%value is 4in.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotheight}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotheight}
-%\end{definition}
-%This length governs the length of the $y$ axis. Note that the plot
-%height does not include any outer tick marks or labels. The default
-%value is 4in
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLticklength}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLticklength}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs the length of the tick marks. The default value is
-%5pt.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminorticklength}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLminorticklength}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs the length of the minor tick marks. The default value is
-%2pt.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLticklabeloffset}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLticklabeloffset}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs the distance from the axis to the tick labels. The 
-%default value is 8pt.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmintickgap}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmintickgap}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is the minimum distance allowed between tick marks. If the
-%plot width or height is less than this distance there will only
-%be tick marks at either end of the axis. The default value is
-%20pt.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLlegendxoffset}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLlegendxoffset}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is the horizontal distance from the border of the plot to the 
-%outer border of the legend. The default value is 10pt.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLlegendyoffset}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLlegendyoffset}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is the vertical distance from the border of the plot to the 
-%outer border of the legend. The default value is 10pt.
-%
-%\subsubsection{Counters}
-%These counters govern the appearance of plots 
-%created using \ics{DTLplot}. The value of the counters can be
-%changed using \cs{setcounter}.
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}
-%\end{definition}
-%Unless you specify your own tick labels, the $x$ tick labels will 
-%be given by the tick points rounded to \meta{n} digits after the
-%decimal point, where \meta{n} is the value of the counter
-%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}.
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}
-%\end{definition}
-%Unless you specify your own tick labels, the $y$ tick labels will 
-%be given by the tick points rounded to \meta{n} digits after the
-%decimal point, where \meta{n} is the value of the counter
-%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}.
-%
-%\subsubsection{Macros}
-%These macros govern the appearance of plots created using
-%\ics{DTLplot}. They can be changed using \cs{renewcommand}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotmarks}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotmarks}
-%\end{definition}
-%This must be a comma separated list of \sty{pgf} code to create the 
-%plot marks.  \ics{DTLplot} cycles through this list for each
-%database listed. The \sty{pgf} package provides convenient commands
-%for generating plots using \cs{pgfuseplotmark}. See the \sty{pgf}
-%manual for more details.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotmarkcolors}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotmarkcolors}
-%\end{definition}
-%This must be a comma separated list of defined colours to apply to the
-%plot marks. \ics{DTLplot} cycles through this list for each database
-%listed. If this macro is set to empty, the current colour will
-%be used instead.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotlines}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotlines}
-%\end{definition}
-%This must be a comma separated list of \sty{pgf} code to set the
-%style of the plot lines.  \ics{DTLplot} cycles through this list for 
-%each database listed. Dash patterns can be set using \cs{pgfsetdash},
-%see the \sty{pgf} manual for more details. If \cs{DTLplotlines} is
-%set to empty the current line style will be used instead.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotlinecolors}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotlinecolors}
-%\end{definition}
-%This must be a comma separated list of defined colours to apply to the
-%plot lines. \cs{DTLplot} cycles through this list for each database
-%listed. If this macro is set to empty, the current colour will
-%be used instead. The default is the same as \cs{DTLplotmarkcolors}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLXAxisStyle}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLxaxisstyle}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs the style of the $x$ axis. It is passed as the optional
-%argument to the TikZ \cs{draw} command. By default it is just "-"
-%which is a solid line style with no start or end arrows. The $x$
-%axis line starts from the bottom left corner of the plot and extends
-%to the bottom right corner of the plot. So if you want the $x$ axis
-%to have an arrow head at the right end, you can do:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLXAxisStyle}{->}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLYAxisStyle}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLyaxisstyle}
-%\end{definition}
-%This governs the style of the $y$ axis. It is analogous to
-%\cs{DTLxaxisstyle} described above.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmajorgridstyle}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmajorgridstyle}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the format of the major grid lines.
-%It may be set to any TikZ setting that you can pass to the
-%optional argument of \cs{draw}. The default value is
-%"color=gray,-" which indicates a grey solid line.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminorgridstyle}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLminorgridstyle}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the format of the minor grid lines.
-%It may be set to any TikZ setting that you can pass to the
-%optional argument of \cs{draw}. The default value is
-%"color=gray,loosely dotted" which indicates a grey dotted line.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLformatlegend}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLformatlegend}\marg{legend}
-%\end{definition}
-%This formats the entire legend, which is passed as the argument.
-%The default is to set the legend with
-%a white background, a black frame.
-%
-%\subsection{Adding to a Plot Stream}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotstream}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotstream}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{x key}\marg{y key}
-%\end{definition}
-%This adds points to a stream from the database called \meta{db name}
-%where the $x$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{x key}
-%and the $y$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{y key}.
-%(\ics{DTLconverttodecimal} is used to convert locale dependent
-%values to a standard decimal that is recognised by the
-%\sty{pgf} package.)
-%The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-%for \ics{DTLforeach}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{Adding to a Plot Stream}{ex:plotstream}
-%Suppose you have a CSV file called "data.csv" containing the 
-%following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%x,y
-%0,0
-%1,1
-%2,0.5
-%1.5,0.3
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{data}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{0}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{0}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{1}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{1}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{2}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{0.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{1.5}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{0.3}\relax
-%First load the file into a database called "data":
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{data}{data.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Now create a figure containing this data:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[tbhp]
-%\centering
-%\begin{tikzpicture}
-%\pgfplothandlermark{\pgfuseplotmark{o}}
-%\pgfplotstreamstart
-%\DTLplotstream{data}{x}{y}%
-%\pgfplotstreamend
-%\pgfusepath{stroke}
-%\end{tikzpicture}
-%\caption{Adding to a Plot Stream}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:plotstream}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[tbhp]
-%\centering
-%\begin{tikzpicture}
-%\pgfplothandlermark{\pgfuseplotmark{o}}
-%\pgfplotstreamstart
-%\DTLplotstream{data}{x}{y}%
-%\pgfplotstreamend
-%\pgfusepath{stroke}
-%\end{tikzpicture}
-%\caption{Adding to a Plot Stream}
-%\label{fig:plotstream}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{Plotting Multiple Keys in the Same 
-%Database}{ex:multikey}
-%Suppose I have conducted two time to growth experiments. For each
-%experiment, I have recorded the log count at set times, and I have
-%recorded this information in the same data file called, say,
-%"growth.csv" which contains the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Time,Experiment 1,Experiment 2
-%0,3.73,3.6
-%23,3.67,3.7
-%60,4.9,3.8
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\DTLnewdb{growth}\DTLnewrow{growth}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Time}{0}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 1}{3.73}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 2}{3.6}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{growth}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Time}{23}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 1}{3.67}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 2}{3.7}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{growth}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Time}{60}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 1}{4.9}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 2}{3.8}\relax
-%I can load the data into a database using:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{growth}{growth.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%However, I'd like to plot both results on the same graph. Since they
-%are contained in the same database, I can't use the method I used
-%in \autoref{ex:2db}. Instead I can use a combination of 
-%\ics{DTLplot} and \ics{DTLplotstream}:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[tbhp]
-%\centering
-%% computer bounds
-%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Time}{\minX}
-%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\minY}
-%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Time}{\maxX}
-%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\maxY}
-%% round x tick labels
-%\setcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}{0}
-%% redefine \DTLplotatbegintikz to plot the data for Experiment 1
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatbegintikz}{%
-%% set plot mark
-%\pgfplothandlermark{\color{green}\pgfuseplotmark{x}}
-%% start plot stream
-%\pgfplotstreamstart
-%% add data from Experiment 1 to plot stream
-%\DTLplotstream{growth}{Time}{Experiment 1}%
-%% end plot stream
-%\pgfplotstreamend
-%% stroke path
-%\pgfusepath{stroke}
-%% add information to legend (no line is require so use \relax)
-%\DTLaddtoplotlegend{\color{green}%
-%\pgfuseplotmark{x}}{\relax}{Experiment 1}
-%}
-%% now plot the data for Experiment 2
-%\DTLplot{growth}{x=Time,y=Experiment 2,legend,
-%width=3in,height=3in,bounds={\minX,\minY,\maxX,\maxY},
-%xlabel={Time},ylabel={Log Count},
-%legendlabels={Experiment 2}}
-%\caption{Time to Growth Data}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:multikey}. 
-%Notes:
-%\begin{itemize}
-%\item I redefined \ics{DTLplotatbegintikz} in order to add
-%the new plot to the legend, since \ics{DTLplotatendtikz} is 
-%used after the legend is plotted. The $x$ and $y$ unit vectors
-%are set before \ics{DTLplotatbegintikz} so I don't need to 
-%worry about the co-ordinates.
-%\item I set the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar} to zero 
-%otherwise the $x$ axis would have looked too cluttered.
-%\item I have used \ics{DTLminforkeys} and \ics{DTLmaxforkeys} to
-%determine the bounds since \ics{DTLplot} won't take the data
-%for Experiment 1 into account when computing the bounds.
-%\end{itemize}
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Time}{\minX}
-%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\minY}
-%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Time}{\maxX}
-%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\maxY}
-%\setcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}{0}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatbegintikz}{%
-%\pgfplothandlermark{\color{green}\pgfuseplotmark{x}}
-%\pgfplotstreamstart
-%\DTLplotstream{growth}{Time}{Experiment 1}%
-%\pgfplotstreamend
-%\pgfusepath{stroke}
-%\DTLaddtoplotlegend{\color{green}\pgfuseplotmark{x}}{\relax}{Experiment 1}
-%}
-%\centering
-%\DTLplot{growth}{x=Time,y=Experiment 2,legend,
-%width=3in,height=3in,bounds={\minX,\minY,\maxX,\maxY},
-%xlabel={Time},ylabel={Log Count},
-%legendlabels={Experiment 2}}
-%\caption{Time to Growth Data}
-%\label{fig:multikey}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\section{Bar Charts (\texorpdfstring{databar}{databar} package)}
-%
-%The \sty{databar} package provides commands for creating bar charts.
-%It is not loaded by the \sty{datatool} package, so if you want to
-%use it you will need to load it explicitly using 
-%"\usepackage{databar}".
-%
-%Bar charts can either be vertical or horizontal, the default is
-%vertical. In this section the $x$ axis refers to the horizontal
-%axis when plotting a vertical bar chart and to the vertical axis
-%when plotting a horizontal bar chart. The $x$ axis units are in 
-%increments of one bar. The $y$ axis refers to the vertical axis
-%when plotting a vertical bar chart and to the horizontal axis when
-%plotting a horizontal bar chart. The $y$ axis uses the same 
-%co-ordinates as the data. The bars may have an upper and lower
-%label. In a vertical bar chart, the lower label is placed below
-%the $x$ axis and the upper label is placed above the top of the bar.
-%In a horizontal bar chart, the lower label is placed to the left of
-%the $x$ axis and the upper label is placed to the right of the 
-%end of the bar. (This is actually a misnomer as it is possible
-%for the ``upper'' label to be below the ``lower'' label if a
-%bar has a negative value, however the bars are considered to
-%be anchored on the $x$ axis, and the other end of the bar is
-%considered to be the ``upper'' end, regardless of its
-%direction.)
-%
-%The \sty{databar} package options are as follows:
-%\begin{description}
-%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{color}}] Created coloured bar charts 
-%(default.)
-%
-%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{gray}}] Created grey scale bar charts.
-%
-%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{vertical}}] Created vertical bar charts
-%(default.)
-%
-%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{horizontal}}] Created horizontal bar charts.
-%\end{description}
-%
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarchart}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarchart}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{settings}\marg{values}
-%\end{definition}
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmultibarchart}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{settings}\marg{values}
-%\end{definition}
-%These commands both create a bar chart from the information in
-%the database \meta{db name}, where \meta{condition} is the same
-%as the optional argument for \ics{DTLforeach} described in
-%\autoref{sec:dbforeach}, and \meta{values} is the same as the
-%penultimate argument of \ics{DTLforeach}. The \meta{settings}
-%argument is a \meta{setting}"="\meta{value} list of settings. The
-%first command, \cs{DLTbarchart}, will draw a bar chart for a
-%given column of data in the database, whereas the second command,
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}, will draw a bar chart that is divided into
-%groups of bars where each bar within a group represents data from
-%several columns of a given row in the database.
-%
-%The \setting{DTLbarchart}{variable} setting is
-%required for \cs{DTLbarchart} and the 
-%\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{variables}, the other settings are 
-%optional (though some may only be used for one of
-%\cs{DTLbarchart} and \cs{DLTmultibarchart}), and are as follows:
-%
-%\begin{description}
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart}{variable}] 
-%This specifies the control sequence to use that 
-%contains the value used to construct the bar chart. The control
-%sequence must be one of the control sequences to appear in
-%the assignment list \meta{values}. This setting is required
-%for \cs{DTLbarchart}, and is unavailable for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{variables}] 
-%This specifies a list of control sequences to use which 
-%contain the values used to construct the bar chart. Each control
-%sequence must be one of the control sequences to appear in
-%the assignment list \meta{values}. This setting is required
-%for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}, and is unavailable for
-%\cs{DTLbarchart}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{max}]
-%This specifies the maximum value on the $y$ axis. (This should
-%be a standard decimal value.)
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{length}]
-%This specifies the overall length of the $y$ axis, and must
-%be a dimension.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{maxdepth}]
-%This must be a zero or negative number. It specifies the maximum
-%depth of the $y$ axis. (This should be a standard decimal value.)
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{axes}]
-%This setting specifies which axes to display. This may take one
-%of the following values: "both", "x", "y" or "none".
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{barlabel}]
-%This setting specifies the lower bar label. When used with
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart} it indicates the group label.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{multibarlabels}]
-%This setting should contain a comma separated list of labels
-%for each bar within a group for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}. This
-%setting is not available for \cs{DTLbarchart}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart}{upperbarlabel}]
-%This setting specifies the upper bar label. This setting
-%is not available for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{uppermultibarlabels}]
-%This setting must be a comma separated list of upper bar
-%labels for each bar within a group. This setting is not 
-%available for \cs{DTLbarchart}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{yticpoints}]
-%This must be a comma separated list of tick locations for the
-%$y$ axis. (These should be standard decimal values.)
-%This setting overrides \setting{DTLbarchart}{yticgap}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{yticgap}]
-%This specifies the gap between the $y$ tick marks. (This should
-%be a standard decimal value.)
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{yticlabels}]
-%This must be a comma separated list of tick labels for the
-%$y$ axis.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{ylabel}]
-%This specifies the label for the $y$ axis.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{groupgap}] This specifies
-%the gap between groups when using \cs{DTLmultibarchart}.
-%This value is given as a multiple of the bar width. The
-%default value is 1, which indicates a gap of one bar width.
-%This setting is not available for \cs{DTLbarchart}.
-%
-%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{verticalbars}]
-%This is a boolean setting, so it can only take the values
-%"true" (do a vertical bar chart) or "false" (do a horizontal
-%bar chart.) If the value is omitted, "true" is assumed.
-%\end{description}
-%
-%\begin{example}{A Basic Bar Chart}{ex:barchart}
-%Recall \autoref{ex:piechart} defined a database called "fruit".
-%This example will be using that database to plot a bar chart.
-%The following plots a basic vertical bar chart:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity}{fruit}{\theQuantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Basic Bar Chart}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:barchart}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity}{fruit}{\theQuantity=Quantity}
-%\caption{A Basic Bar Chart}
-%\label{fig:barchart}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\subsection{Changing the Appearance of a Bar Chart}
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarchartlength}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarchartlength}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the total length of the $y$ axis. You must use
-%\cs{setlength} to change this value. The default value is 3in.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarwidth}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarwidth}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the width of each bar. You must use \cs{setlength}
-%to change this value. The default value is 1cm.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarlabeloffset}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarlabeloffset}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the distance from the $x$ axis to the lower bar label.
-%You must use \cs{setlength} to change this value. The default value
-%is 10pt.
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\counterfmt{DTLbarroundvar}
-%\end{definition}
-%The $y$ tick labels are rounded to \meta{n} digits after the
-%decimal point, where \meta{n} is given by the value of the
-%counter \counterfmt{DTLbarroundvar}. You must use \cs{setcounter}
-%to change this value.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetbarcolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetbarcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the \meta{n}th bar colour to \meta{color}.
-%Only the first eight bars have a colour defined by default. If you
-%need more than eight bars, you will need to define more bar colours.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdobarcolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdobarcolor}\marg{n}
-%\end{definition}
-%This sets the current colour to the colour of the \meta{n}th bar.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaroutlinecolor}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbaroutlinecolor}
-%\end{definition}
-%This macro contains the colour of the bar outlines. This defaults
-%to "black".
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbaroutlinewidth}
-%\end{definition}
-%This length specifies the line width for the bar outlines. If it
-%is 0pt, the outline is not drawn. The default value is 0pt.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaratbegintikz}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbaratbegintikz}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies any additional commands to add to the start of
-%the plot. It defaults to nothing, and is called after the
-%unit vectors are set.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaratendtikz}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbaratendtikz}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies any additional commands to add to the end of
-%the plot. It defaults to nothing.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\ifDTLverticalbars}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{ifDTLverticalbars}
-%\end{definition}
-%This conditional governs whether the chart uses vertical or
-%horizontal bars.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarXlabelalign}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarXlabelalign}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the text alignment of the lower bar labels. This
-%defaults to "left,rotate=-90" if you use the \pkgopt[databar]{vertical}
-%package option or the \setting{DTLbarchart}{verticalbars} setting,
-%and defaults to "right" if you use the \pkgopt[databar]{horizontal}
-%package option or the \setting{DTLbarchart}{verticalbars}"=false"
-%setting.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarYlabelalign}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies the text alignment of the $y$ axis labels. This
-%defaults to "right" for vertical bar charts and "center" for
-%horizontal bar charts.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbardisplayYticklabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies how to display the $y$ tick label. The argument
-%is the tick label.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies how to display the lower bar label for
-%\cs{DTLbarchart} and the lower bar group label for
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies how to display the lower bar label for
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label. This 
-%command is ignored by \cs{DTLbarchart}.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayupperbarlabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayupperbarlabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies how to display the upper bar label for
-%\cs{DTLbarchart} and the upper bar group label for
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label.
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-%This specifies how to display the upper bar label for
-%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label. This 
-%command is ignored by \cs{DTLbarchart}.
-%
-%\begin{example}{An Labelled Bar Chart}{ex:annotebarchart}
-%This example extends \autoref{ex:barchart} so that the chart is
-%a bit more informative (which is after all the whole point of
-%a chart.) This chart now has a label below each bar, as well 
-%as a label above the bar. The lower label uses the value of the
-%"Name" key, and the upper label uses the quantity. I have also
-%set the outline width so each bar has a border.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt}
-%\centering
-%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity,barlabel=\theName,%
-%upperbarlabel=\theQuantity}{fruit}{%
-%\theQuantity=Quantity,\theName=Name}
-%\caption{A Basic Bar Chart}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:annotebarchart}.
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt}
-%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity,barlabel=\theName,
-%upperbarlabel=\theQuantity}{fruit}{%
-%\theQuantity=Quantity,\theName=Name}
-%\caption{A Bar Chart}
-%\label{fig:annotebarchart}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{Profit/Loss Bar Chart}{ex:profit}
-%Suppose I have a file called "profits.csv" that looks like:
-%\DTLnewdb{profits}
-%\DTLnewrow{profits}
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2000}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{\protect\pounds2,525}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{profits}
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2001}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{\protect\pounds3,752}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{profits}
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2002}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{-\protect\pounds1,520}\relax
-%\DTLnewrow{profits}
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2003}\relax
-%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{\protect\pounds1,270}\relax
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%Year,Profit
-%2000,\pounds2,535
-%2001,\pounds3,752
-%2002,-\pounds1,520
-%2003,\pounds1,270
-%\end{verbatim}
-%First I can load this file into a database called "profits":
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\DTLloaddb{profits}{profits.csv}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%Now I can plot the data as a bar chart:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%% Set the width of each bar to 10pt
-%\setlength{\DTLbarwidth}{10pt}
-%% Set the outline width to 1pt
-%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt}
-%% Round the $y$ tick labels to integers
-%\setcounter{DTLbarroundvar}{0}
-%% Adjust the tick label offset
-%\setlength{\DTLticklabeloffset}{20pt}
-%% Change the y tick label alignment
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}{left}
-%% Rotate the y tick labels
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}[1]{\rotatebox{-45}{#1}}
-%% Set the bar colours depending on the value of \theProfit
-%\DTLforeach{profits}{\theProfit=Profit}{%
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLislt{\theProfit}{0}}
-%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{red}}
-%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{blue}}}
-%% Do the bar chart
-%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theProfit,upperbarlabel=\theYear,
-%ylabel={Profit/Loss (\pounds)},verticalbars=false,
-%maxdepth=-2000,max=4000}{profits}
-%{\theProfit=Profit,\theYear=Year}
-%\caption{Profits for 2000--2003}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:profits}. Notes:
-%\begin{enumerate}
-%\item This example uses \cs{rotatebox}, so the \sty{graphics}
-%or \sty{graphicx} package is required.
-%\item The $y$ tick labels are too wide to fit horizontally
-%so they have been rotated to avoid overlapping with their
-%neighbour.
-%\item Rotating the $y$ tick labels puts them too close to
-%the $y$ axis, so \ics{DTLticklabeloffset} is made larger to
-%compensate.
-%\item Remember not to use \cs{year} as an assignment command
-%as this command already exists!
-%\item Before the bar chart is created I have iterated through
-%the database, setting the bar colour to red or blue
-%depending on the value of \cs{theProfit}.
-%\end{enumerate}
-%
-%Both \cs{DTLbarchart} and \cs{DTLmultibarchart} set the following
-%macros, which may be used in \cs{DTLbaratbegintikz} and
-%\cs{DTLbaratendtikz}:
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarchartwidth}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarchartwidth}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is the overall width of the bar chart. In the case of
-%\cs{DTLbarchart} this is just the number of bars. In the case
-%of \cs{DTLmultibarchart} it is computed as:
-%\begin{displaymath}
-%m \times n + (m-1)\times g
-%\end{displaymath}
-%where $m$ is the number of bar groups (i.e.\ the number of rows
-%of data), $n$ is the number of bars within a group (i.e.\ 
-%the number of commands listed in the 
-%\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{variables}) setting and $g$ is the
-%group gap (as specified by the \setting{DTLmultibarchart}{groupgap} setting.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnegextent}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLnegextent}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is set to the negative extent of the bar chart. (This value
-%may either be zero or negative, and corresponds to the
-%\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{maxdepth} setting.)
-%
-%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarmax}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLbarmax}
-%\end{definition}
-%This is set to the maximum extent of the bar chart. (This value
-%corresponds to the
-%\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{max} setting.)
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\setlength{\DTLbarwidth}{10pt}
-%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt}
-%\setlength{\DTLticklabeloffset}{20pt}
-%\setcounter{DTLbarroundvar}{0}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}{left}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}[1]{\rotatebox{-45}{#1}}
-%\DTLforeach{profits}{\theProfit=Profit}{\relax
-%\ifthenelse{\DTLislt{\theProfit}{0}}
-%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{red}}
-%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{blue}}}
-%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theProfit,upperbarlabel=\theYear,
-%ylabel={Profit/Loss (\pounds)},verticalbars=false,
-%maxdepth=-2000,max=4000
-%}{profits}
-%{\theProfit=Profit,\theYear=Year}
-%\caption{Profits for 2000--2003}
-%\label{fig:profits}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%\end{example}
-%
-%\begin{example}{A Multi-Bar Chart}{ex:multibar}
-%This example uses the "marks" database described in 
-%\autoref{ex:editdb}.
-%Recall that this database stores student marks for three 
-%assignments. The keys for the assignment marks are 
-%\texttt{Assignment 1}, \texttt{Assignment 2} and 
-%\texttt{Assignment 3}, respectively. I can convert this
-%data into a bar chart using the following:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLmultibarchart{variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII},
-%barwidth=10pt,uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII},
-%barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}}{marks}{%
-%\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\assignI=Assignment 1,%
-%\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3}
-%\caption{Student Marks}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%This produces \autoref{fig:multibar}. Notes:
-%\begin{enumerate}
-%\item I used "variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}" to
-%set the variable to use for each bar within a group. This means
-%that there will be three bars in each group.
-%\item I have set the bar width to 10pt, otherwise the chart
-%will be too wide.
-%\item I used "uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}"
-%to set the upper labels for each bar within a group. This
-%will print the assignment mark above the relevant bar.
-%\item I used "barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}" to place the
-%student's name below the group corresponding to that student.
-%\end{enumerate}
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLmultibarchart{variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII},
-%barwidth=10pt,uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII},
-%barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}}{marks}
-%{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3}
-%\caption{Student Marks}\label{fig:multibar}
-%\end{figure}
-%
-%Recall that \autoref{ex:editdb} computed the average score over
-%for each student, and saved it with the key "Average". This
-%information can be added to the bar chart. It might also be
-%useful to compute the average over all students and add this
-%information to the chart. This is done as follows:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%which produces \autoref{fig:multibarmean}. Notes:
-%\begin{enumerate}
-%\item I've used the TikZ snake library to create a brace, so
-%I need to put
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\usetikzlibrary{snakes}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%in the preamble. See the \sty{pgf} manual for more details on
-%how to use this library.
-%
-%\item I used \ics{DTLbargroupwidth} to indicate the width of
-%each bar group.
-%
-%\item I used \ics{DTLbarchartwidth} to indicate the width of the
-%entire bar chart
-%\end{enumerate}
-%
-%\begin{figure}[htbp]
-%\centering
-%\DTLmeanforkeys{marks}{Average}{\overallmean}
-%\DTLround{\overallmean}{\overallmean}{2}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLbaratendtikz}{\draw[lightgray,loosely dotted] (0,\overallmean) --
-%(\DTLbarchartwidth,\overallmean) node[right,black]{Average (\overallmean)};}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}[1]{\relax
-%\tikz[baseline=(current bounding box.center)]{
-%\draw[snake=brace,rotate=-90](0,0) -- (\DTLbargroupwidth,0);}
-%\DTLround{\theMean}{\theMean}{2}\relax
-%\shortstack{#1\\(Average: \theMean)}}
-%\DTLmultibarchart{variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII},
-%barwidth=10pt,uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII},
-%barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}}{marks}
-%{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3,\theMean=Average}
-%\caption{Student Marks (with average scores)}
-%\label{fig:multibarmean}
-%\end{figure}
-%\end{example}
-%
-% \StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection
-%\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex}
-%
-%
-%
-%\section{datatool.sty}
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*datatool.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\subsection{Package Declaration}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{datatool}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)]
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Load required packages:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
-\RequirePackage{ifthen}
-\RequirePackage{xfor}
-\RequirePackage{fp}
-\RequirePackage{substr}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\subsection{Package Options}
-% Define macro to store data separator character (comma by default)
-% This is the separator used in external data files, not in the
-% \LaTeX\ code, which always uses a comma separator.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@separator}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@separator}{,}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide a command for setting the data separator. This sets
-% \cs{@dtl@separator}, and constructs the relevent macros that
-% require this character to be hardcoded into their definition.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetseparator}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsetseparator}[1]{%
-\renewcommand*{\@dtl@separator}{#1}%
-\@dtl@construct@lopoffs
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Make it easier to set a tab separator
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsettabseparator}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\	12
-\gdef\DTLsettabseparator{%
-  \catcode`\	12
-  \DTLsetseparator{	}%
-}
-\endgroup
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define a macro to store data delimiter character (double quote
-% by default.) This is used in external data files, not in the
-% \LaTeX\ code.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@delimiter}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\"12\relax
-\gdef\@dtl@delimiter{"}
-\endgroup
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define a macro that sets the delimiter.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetdelimiter}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*\DTLsetdelimiter[1]{%
-\renewcommand*{\@dtl@delimiter}{#1}%
-\@dtl@construct@lopoffs}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% \cs{@dtl@construct@lopoff}\meta{separator char}\meta{delimiter char}
-% defines 
-% \cs{@dtl@lopoff}\meta{first element}\meta{sep}\meta{rest of list}\cs{to}\meta{cmd1}\meta{cmd2} 
-% for the current separator and delimiter.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@lopoff}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@construct@lopoff#1#2{%
-\noexpand\long\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@lopoff#1##1##2\noexpand
-\to##3##4{%
-\noexpand\ifx#2##1\noexpand\relax
-\noexpand\@dtl@qlopoff#1##1##2\noexpand\to##3##4\relax
-\noexpand\else
-\noexpand\@dtl@lop@ff#1##1##2\noexpand\to##3##4\relax
-\noexpand\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define command to construct macro \cs{@dtl@qlopoff} to be used 
-% when the entry is surrounded by the current delimiter value.
-% Syntax:
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@construct@qlopoff}\meta{separator char}\meta{delimiter char}
-%\end{definition}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@qlopoff}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@construct@qlopoff#1#2{%
-\noexpand\long\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@qlopoff#1#2##1#2#1##2\noexpand
-\to##3##4{%
-\noexpand\def##4{##1}\noexpand\def##3{#1##2}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define command to construct macro \cs{@dtl@lop@ff} to be used when 
-% the entry isn't surrouded by the delimiter.
-%Syntax:
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@construct@lop@ff}\meta{separator char}
-%\end{definition}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@lop@ff}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@construct@lop@ff#1{%
-\noexpand\long\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@lop@ff#1##1#1##2\noexpand
-\to##3##4{%
-\noexpand\def##4{##1}\noexpand\def##3{#1##2}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Construct all the lopoff macros.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@lopoffs}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\@dtl@construct@lopoffs}{%
-\edef\@dtl@chars{{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@delimiter}}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@construct@lopoff\@dtl@chars
-\expandafter\@dtl@construct@qlopoff\@dtl@chars
-\expandafter\@dtl@construct@lop@ff\expandafter{\@dtl@separator}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define the decimal character
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimal}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@decimal}{.}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%Define the number group character
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}{,}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsetnumberchars}\marg{number group char}\marg{decimal char}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets the decimal character and number group
-% characters.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetnumberchars}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsetnumberchars}[2]{%
-\renewcommand*{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}{#1}%
-\renewcommand*{\@dtl@decimal}{#2}%
-\@dtl@construct@getnums
-\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Construct macros for extracting integer and 
-% fractional parts from a real number using the decimal character 
-% given by "#1".
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLconverttodecimal}\marg{num}\marg{cmd} 
-%\end{definition}
-% \cs{DTLconverttodecimal} will convert locale dependent \meta{num}
-% a decimal number in a form that can be used in the
-% macros defined in the \sty{fp} package. The resulting
-% number is stored in \meta{cmd}. This command has to be redefined
-% whenever the decimal and number group characters are changed
-% as they form part of the command definitions.
-%
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@getintfrac}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@construct@getintfrac#1{%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@getintfrac##1#1##2\noexpand\relax{%
-\noexpand\@dtl@get@intpart{##1}%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart{##2}%
-\noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@empty\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart
- \noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart{0}%
-\noexpand\else
- \noexpand\@dtl@getfracpart##2\noexpand\relax
- \noexpand\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes{\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart}%
-\noexpand\fi
-}%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@getfracpart##1#1\noexpand\relax{%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart{##1}%
-}%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\DTLconverttodecimal##1##2{%
-\noexpand\dtl@ifsingle{##1}%
-{\noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\toks@\noexpand\expandafter{##1}%
-\noexpand\edef\noexpand\@dtl@tmp{\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@}}%
-{\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@tmp{##1}}%
- \noexpand\@dtl@standardize@currency\noexpand\@dtl@tmp
- \noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@dtl@org@currency\noexpand\@empty
- \noexpand\else
-   \noexpand\let\noexpand\@dtl@currency\noexpand\@dtl@org@currency
- \noexpand\fi
-\noexpand\expandafter
-\noexpand\@dtl@getintfrac\noexpand\@dtl@tmp#1\noexpand\relax
-\noexpand\edef##2{\noexpand\@dtl@intpart.\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart}}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define command to call the above with the relevant decimal
-% character:
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@getnums}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@construct@getnums}{%
-\expandafter\@dtl@construct@getintfrac\expandafter{\@dtl@decimal}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Get the integer (adjusting for repeating +/- signs if neccessary)
-% Sets \cs{@dtl@intpart}.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@intpart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@get@intpart}[1]{%
-\@dtl@tmpcount=1\relax
-\def\@dtl@intpart{#1}%
-\ifx\@dtl@intpart\@empty
-  \def\@dtl@intpart{0}%
-\else
-  \def\@dtl@intpart{}%
-  \@dtl@get@int@part#1.\relax%
-\fi
-\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount<0\relax
-  \edef\@dtl@intpart{-\@dtl@intpart}%
-\fi
-\@dtl@strip@numgrpchar{\@dtl@intpart}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@int@part}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@get@int@part#1#2\relax{%
-\def\@dtl@argi{#1}%
-\def\@dtl@argii{#2}%
-\ifx\protect#1\relax%
-  \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part
-\else
-  \expandafter\ifx\@dtl@argi\$%
-    \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part
-  \else
-    \ifx-#1%
-      \multiply\@dtl@tmpcount by -1\relax
-      \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part
-    \else
-      \if\@dtl@argi+%
-        \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part
-      \else
-        \def\@dtl@intpart{#1}%
-        \ifx.\@dtl@argii
-          \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@gobble
-        \else
-          \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@next@intpart
-        \fi
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\@dtl@get@nextintpart#2\relax
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@next@intpart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@get@next@intpart#1.\relax{%
-\edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@choptrailingzeroes}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Chop trailing zeroes from number given by \meta{cmd}.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes}[1]{%
-\def\@dtl@tmpcpz{}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes#1\@nil%
-\let#1=\@dtl@tmpcpz
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Trailing zeroes are chopped using a recursive algorithm.
-% \cs{@dtl@tmpcpz} needs to be set before using this. (The chopped
-% number is put in this control sequence.)
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes#1#2\@nil{%
-\FPifeq{#2}{0}%
-  \edef\@dtl@tmpcpz{\@dtl@tmpcpz#1}%
-  \let\@dtl@chopzeroesnext=\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroesnoop
-\else
- \edef\@dtl@tmpcpz{\@dtl@tmpcpz#1}%
- \let\@dtl@chopzeroesnext=\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes
-\fi
-\@dtl@chopzeroesnext#2\@nil
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% No-op macro to end recursion
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroesnoop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroesnoop#1\@nil{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@truncatedecimal}\meta{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-%Truncates decimal given by \meta{cmd} to an integer (assumes in
-% decimal format with full stop as decimal point)
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@truncatedecimal}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@truncatedecimal}[1]{%
-\expandafter\@dtl@truncatedecimal#1.\@nil#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@truncatedecimal}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@truncatedecimal#1.#2\@nil#3{%
-\def#3{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@strip@numgrpchar}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Strip the number group character from the number given by
-% \meta{cmd}.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@strip@numgrpchar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@strip@numgrpchar}[1]{%
-\def\@dtl@stripped{}%
-\edef\@dtl@do@stripnumgrpchar{%
-\noexpand\@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar#1\@dtl@numbergroupchar
-\noexpand\relax}%
-\@dtl@do@stripnumgrpchar
-\let#1=\@dtl@stripped
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define command to construct macro \cs{@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar#1{%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar##1#1##2\noexpand\relax{%
-\noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\toks@\noexpand\expandafter
-{\noexpand\@dtl@stripped}%
-\noexpand\edef\noexpand\@dtl@stripped{\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@
-##1}%
-\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@tmp{##2}%
-\noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@dtl@tmp\noexpand\@empty
- \noexpand\let\noexpand\@dtl@next=\noexpand\relax
-\noexpand\else
- \noexpand\let\noexpand\@dtl@next=\noexpand\@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar
-\noexpand\fi
-\noexpand\@dtl@next##2\noexpand\relax
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLdecimaltolocale}\marg{number}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Define command to convert a decimal number into the locale
-% dependent format. Stores result in \meta{cmd} which must be
-% a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdecimaltolocale}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdecimaltolocale}[2]{%
-\edef\@dtl@tmpdtl{#1}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@decimaltolocale\@dtl@tmpdtl.\relax
-\FPifeq{\@dtl@fracpart}{0}%
- \edef#2{\@dtl@intpart}%
-\else
- \edef#2{\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Convert the integer part (store in \cs{@dtl@intpart})
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimaltolocale}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@decimaltolocale#1.#2\relax{%
-\@dtl@decimaltolocaleint{#1}%
-\def\@dtl@fracpart{#2}%
-\ifx\@dtl@fracpart\@empty
- \def\@dtl@fracpart{0}%
-\else
- \@dtl@decimaltolocalefrac#2\relax
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimaltolocaleint}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@decimaltolocaleint#1{%
-\@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax
-\@dtl@countdigits#1.\relax
-\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=\@dtl@tmpcount\relax
-\divide\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 3\relax
-\multiply\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 3\relax
-\advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by -\@dtl@tmpcount\relax
-\ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount<0\relax
-  \advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 3\relax
-\fi
-\def\@dtl@intpart{}%
-\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint#1.\relax
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Counts the number of digits until "#2" is a full stop.
-% (increments \cs{@dtl@tmpcount}.)
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@countdigits}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@countdigits#1#2\relax{%
-\advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-\ifx.#2\relax
- \let\@dtl@countnext=\@gobble
-\else
- \let\@dtl@countnext=\@dtl@countdigits
-\fi
-\@dtl@countnext#2\relax
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint#1#2\relax{%
-\advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 1\relax
-\ifx.#2\relax
- \edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1}%
- \let\@dtl@localeintnext=\@gobble
-\else
- \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=3\relax
-   \edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1\@dtl@numbergroupchar}%
-   \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=0\relax
- \else
-   \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount>3\relax
-     \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=0\relax
-   \fi
-   \edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1}%
- \fi
- \let\@dtl@localeintnext=\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint
-\fi
-\@dtl@localeintnext#2\relax
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Convert the fractional part (store in \cs{@dtl@fracpart})
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimaltolocalefrac}
-%   \begin{macrocode}
-%   \end{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@decimaltolocalefrac#1.\relax{%
-\def\@dtl@fracpart{#1}%
-\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes{\@dtl@fracpart}%
-}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}\marg{number}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Define command to convert a decimal number into the locale
-% dependent currency format. Stores result in \meta{cmd} which must be
-% a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdecimaltocurrency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdecimaltocurrency}[2]{%
-\edef\@dtl@tmpdtl{#1}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@decimaltolocale\@dtl@tmpdtl.\relax
-\dtl@truncatedecimal\@dtl@tmpdtl
-\@dtl@tmpcount=\@dtl@tmpdtl\relax
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@currency}%
-\FPifeq{\@dtl@fracpart}{0}%
- \ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount<0\relax
-   \@dtl@tmpcount = -\@dtl@tmpcount\relax
-   \edef#2{-\the\@dtl@toks\the\@dtl@tmpcount\@dtl@decimal00}%
- \else
-   \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal00}%
- \fi
-\else
- \ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount<0\relax
-   \@dtl@tmpcount = -\@dtl@tmpcount\relax
-   \ifnum\@dtl@fracpart<10\relax
-     \edef#2{-\the\@dtl@toks\number\@dtl@tmpcount
-        \@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart0}%
-   \else
-     \edef#2{-\the\@dtl@toks\number\@dtl@tmpcount
-        \@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart}%
-   \fi
- \else
-   \ifnum\@dtl@fracpart<10\relax
-     \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart0}%
-   \else
-     \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart}%
-   \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Set the defaults:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@dtl@construct@lopoffs
-\@dtl@construct@getnums
-\expandafter\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar\expandafter
-{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define key for package option \pkgopt{separator}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datatool.sty}{separator}{%
-\DTLsetseparator{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define key for package option \pkgopt{delimiter}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datatool.sty}{delimiter}{%
-\DTLsetdelimiter{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define key for package option \pkgopt{verbose}. (This also
-% switches the \sty{fp} messages on/off)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{datatool.sty}[dtl]{verbose}[true]{%
-\ifdtlverbose \FPmessagestrue\else \FPmessagesfalse\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Display message only if verbose option set:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@message}[1]{%
-\ifdtlverbose \typeout{#1}\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Process package options:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptionsX
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Requires \texttt{compare.tex}, unless \cs{compare} has already
-% been defined. If paragraph breaks are allowed, these commands
-% need to be defined to be long.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{compare}{\input{compare}}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Many of the commands used by this package are short commands
-% (such as \cs{compare}.) This means that you can't use \cs{par}
-% in the data. To get around this, define the robust command
-% \cs{DTLpar} to use instead.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\DTLpar{\@par}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Determining Data Types}
-% The control sequence \cs{@dtl@checknumerical} checks the data
-% type of its argument, and sets \cs{@dtl@datatype} to 0 if
-% the argument is a string, 1 if the argument is an integer
-% or 2 if the argument is a real number. First define
-% \cs{@dtl@datatype}:
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@datatype}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@dtl@datatype
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define temporary count register
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@tmpcount}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@dtl@tmpcount
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define count register to count the digits between the number
-% group separator.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@numgrpsepcount}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@dtl@numgrpsepcount
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define a macro that checks if the argument is numerical
-% (includes decimal numbers, but not scientific notation.)
-% Sets \cs{@dtl@datatype}, as described above.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumerical}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\@dtl@checknumerical}[1]{%
-\@dtl@numgrpsepfalse
-\def\@dtl@tmp{#1}%
-\ifx\@empty#1\@empty
- \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-\else
- \dtl@ifsingle{#1}%
- {\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}%
- \edef\@dtl@tmp{\the\toks@}}%
- {\def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}%
- \@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax
- \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
- \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=2\relax
- \@dtl@standardize@currency\@dtl@tmp
- \ifx\@dtl@org@currency\@empty
- \else
-   \let\@dtl@currency\@dtl@org@currency
- \fi
- \expandafter\@dtl@checknumericalstart\@dtl@tmp\@nil\@nil
-\fi
-\ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount>-1\relax
-  \if@dtl@numgrpsep
-    \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=3\relax
-    \else
-      \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Check first character for checknumerical process to see if
-% it's a plus or minus sign.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumericalstart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@checknumericalstart#1#2\@nil\@nil{%
-\ifx#1\protect
-  \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax
-\else
-  \if-#1\relax
-    \def\@dtl@tmp{#2}%
-    \ifx\@empty\@dtl@tmp
-      \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-    \else
-      \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-        \@dtl@datatype=1\relax
-      \fi
-      \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \if+#1\relax
-      \def\@dtl@tmp{#2}%
-      \ifx\@empty\@dtl@tmp
-        \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-      \else
-        \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-          \@dtl@datatype=1\relax
-        \fi
-        \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax
-      \fi
-    \else
-    \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}%
-      \ifx#1\$\relax
-        \@dtl@datatype=3\relax
-        \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax
-      \else
-        \ifx\@empty\@dtl@tmp
-          \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-        \else
-          \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-            \@dtl@datatype=1\relax
-          \fi
-          \@dtl@checknumericalloop#1#2\@nil\@nil\relax
-        \fi
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The conditional \cs{if@dtl@numgrpsep} is set the first time
-% \cs{@dtl@checknumericalloop} encounters the number group
-% separator.
-%\begin{macro}{\if@dtl@numgrpsep}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@dtl@numgrpsep
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Check numerical loop. This iterates through each character
-% until \cs{@nil} is reached, or invalid character found.
-% Increments \cs{@dtl@tmpcount} each time it encounters a 
-% decimal character.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumericalloop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@checknumericalloop#1#2\@nil{%
-\def\@dtl@tmp{#1}%
-\ifx\@nnil\@dtl@tmp\relax
- \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop%
-\else
-  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{0}\or
-  \equal{#1}{1}\or
-  \equal{#1}{2}\or
-  \equal{#1}{3}\or
-  \equal{#1}{4}\or
-  \equal{#1}{5}\or
-  \equal{#1}{6}\or
-  \equal{#1}{7}\or
-  \equal{#1}{8}\or
-  \equal{#1}{9}\or
-  \equal{#1}{\@dtl@decimal}}{%
-  \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalloop%
-  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@dtl@decimal}}{%
-     \if@dtl@numgrpsep
-       \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=3\relax
-        \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=-1\relax
-       \else
-        \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-        \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop
-       \fi
-     \else
-       \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=-1\relax
-     \fi
-     }{%
-     \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=-1\relax
-     \else
-       \advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 1\relax
-     \fi}%
-}{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}}{%
-  \@dtl@numgrpseptrue
-  \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount<3\relax
-    \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-    \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop
-  \else
-     \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=0\relax
-  \fi}{%
-  \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-  \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop
-}}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@tmp\relax
-   \ifnum\@dtl@datatype<3\relax
-     \@dtl@datatype=2\relax
-   \fi
-   \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-   \ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount>1\relax
-     \@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-     \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop%
-   \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\@dtl@chcknumnext#2\@nil
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% End loop
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumericalnoop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@checknumericalnoop#1\@nil#2{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifnumerical} which tests the first argument, if
-% its numerical do second argument, otherwise do third argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumerical}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifnumerical}[3]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax#3\else#2\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifreal} which tests the first argument, if
-% it's a real number (not an integer) do second argument, 
-% otherwise do third argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifreal}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifreal}[3]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=2\relax #2\else #3\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifint} which tests the first argument, if
-% it's an integer do second argument, 
-% otherwise do third argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifint}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifint}[3]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=1\relax #2\else #3\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifstring} which tests the first argument, if
-% it's a string do second argument, 
-% otherwise do third argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstring}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifstring}[3]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax #2\else #3\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifcurrency} which tests the first argument, if
-% it starts with the currency symbol do second argument, 
-% otherwise do third argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifcurrency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifcurrency}[3]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=3\relax #2\else #3\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifcurrencyunit} which tests if the first argument
-% is currency, and uses the currency unit given by the
-% second argument. If true do third argument, otherwise
-% do fourth argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifcurrencyunit}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifcurrencyunit}[4]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=3\relax 
-  \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@org@currency}{#2}}{#3}{#4}%
-\else 
-  #4%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define \cs{DTLifcasedatatype} which tests the first argument.
-% If it is a string, do second argument, if it is an integer
-% do third argument, if it is a real number, do fourth argument, 
-% if it is currency, do fifth argument.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifcasedatatype}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifcasedatatype}[5]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}%
-\ifcase\@dtl@datatype
- #2% string
-\or
- #3% integer
-\or
- #4% number
-\or
- #5% currency
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Test if both arguments are numerical. This sets
-% the conditional \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testbothnumerical}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testbothnumerical}[2]{%
-\dtl@ifsingle{#1}{%
- \edef\@dtl@tmp{#1}}{%
- \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}%
-\edef\@dtl@firsttype{\number\@dtl@datatype}%
-\dtl@ifsingle{#2}{%
- \edef\@dtl@tmp{#2}}{%
- \def\@dtl@tmp{#2}}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}%
-\multiply\@dtl@datatype by \@dtl@firsttype\relax
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype>0\relax
- \@dtl@conditiontrue
-\else
- \@dtl@conditionfalse
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumlt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \marg{num1} < \marg{num2}. Both numbers
-% need to have the decimal separator changed to a dot
-% to ensure that it works with \cs{FPiflt}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumlt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifnumlt}[4]{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}%
-  \FPiflt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-   #3%
-  \else
-   #4%
-  \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringlt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% String comparison
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringlt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifstringlt}[4]{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}%
- \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp<0\relax
-   #3%
- \else
-   #4%
- \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiflt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Do \cs{DTLifnumlt} if both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are
-% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringlt}. 
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLiflt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLiflt}[4]{%
-\dtl@testbothnumerical{#1}{#2}%
-\if@dtl@condition
- \DTLifnumlt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\else
- \DTLifstringlt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumgt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \marg{num1} > \marg{num2}. Both numbers
-% need to have the decimal separator changed to a dot
-% to ensure that it works with \cs{FPifgt}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifnumgt}[4]{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}%
-  \FPifgt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-   #3%
-  \else
-   #4%
-  \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringgt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% String comparison
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifstringgt}[4]{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}%
- \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp>0\relax
-   #3%
- \else
-   #4%
- \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifgt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Do \cs{DTLifnumgt} if both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are
-% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringgt}. 
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifgt}[4]{%
-\dtl@testbothnumerical{#1}{#2}%
-\if@dtl@condition
- \DTLifnumgt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\else
- \DTLifstringgt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumeq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \marg{num1} = \marg{num2}. Both numbers
-% need to have the decimal separator changed to a dot
-% to ensure that it works with \cs{FPifeq}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumeq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifnumeq}[4]{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}%
-  \FPifeq{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-   #3%
-  \else
-   #4%
-  \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringeq}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% String comparison
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringeq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifstringeq}[4]{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}%
- \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp=0\relax
-   #3%
- \else
-   #4%
- \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifeq}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Do \cs{DTLifnumeq} if both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are
-% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringeq}. 
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifeq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifeq}[4]{%
-\dtl@testbothnumerical{#1}{#2}%
-\if@dtl@condition
- \DTLifnumeq{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\else
- \DTLifstringeq{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifnumclosedbetween}[5]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numiii}%
-\DTLifFPclosedbetween{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}{\@dtl@numiii}{#4}{#5}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% String comparison
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifstringclosedbetween}[5]{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}%
-\let\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-\expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp<0\relax
-  \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-\fi
-\ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#3}}%
-  \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp>0\relax
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-  \else
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-\@dtl@dovalue
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Do \cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween} if \marg{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are
-% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringclosedbetween}. 
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifclosedbetween}[5]{%
-\dtl@testbothnumerical{#2}{#3}%
-\if@dtl@condition
-  \dtl@ifsingle{#1}{%
-    \edef\@dtl@tmp{#1}}{%
-    \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}%
-  \ifnum\@dtl@datatype>0\relax
-    \DTLifnumclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
-  \else
-    \DTLifstringclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
-  \fi
-\else
-  \DTLifstringclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifnumopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifnumopenbetween}[5]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numiii}%
-\DTLifFPopenbetween{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}{\@dtl@numiii}{#4}{#5}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifstringopenbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% String comparison
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifstringopenbetween}[5]{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}%
-\let\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-\expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp>0\relax
-\else
-  \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-\fi
-\ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#3}}%
-  \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp<0\relax
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}%
-  \else
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-\@dtl@dovalue
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifopenbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Do \cs{DTLifnumopenbetween} if \marg{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are
-% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringopenbetween}. 
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifopenbetween}[5]{%
-\dtl@testbothnumerical{#2}{#3}%
-\if@dtl@condition
-  \dtl@ifsingle{#1}{%
-    \edef\@dtl@tmp{#1}}{%
-    \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}%
-  \ifnum\@dtl@datatype>0\relax
-    \DTLifnumopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
-  \else
-    \DTLifstringopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
-  \fi
-\else
-  \DTLifstringopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifFPopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max} where
-% all arguments are in standard fixed point notation.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifFPopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifFPopenbetween}[5]{%
-  \let\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-  \FPifgt{#1}{#2}%
-  \else
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-  \fi
-  \FPiflt{#1}{#3}%
-    \ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-      \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-  \fi
-\@dtl@dovalue
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifFPclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determine if \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifFPclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifFPclosedbetween}[5]{%
-  \let\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-  \FPifgt{#1}{#3}%
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-  \fi
-  \FPiflt{#1}{#2}%
-    \ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax
-      \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}%
-  \fi
-\@dtl@dovalue
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The following conditionals are only meant to be used within
-% \cs{DTLforeach} as they depend on the counter 
-% \texttt{DTLrow}\meta{n}.
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiffirstrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLiffirstrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLiffirstrow}[2]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLiffirstrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-\expandafter\ifnum\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral
-\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-=1\relax#1\else#2\fi
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLiflastrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLiflastrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLiflastrow}[2]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLiflastrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-\expandafter\ifnum\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral
-\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname=
-\value{DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel}%
-#1\else #2\fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifoddrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifoddrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifoddrow}[2]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLifoddrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-\expandafter\ifodd\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral
-\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-#1\else #2\fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{ifthen Conditionals}
-% The following commands provide conditionals \cs{DTLis}\ldots\ 
-% that can be used in \cs{ifthenelse}. First need to define
-% a new conditional:
-%\begin{macro}{\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@dtl@condition
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first argument is less than second argument.
-% If either argument is a string, a string comparison is used
-% instead.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testlt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testlt}[2]{%
-\DTLiflt{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLislt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLislt}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testlt{#1}{#2}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number is greater than second number.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testgt}[2]{%
-\DTLifgt{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisgt}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testgt{#1}{#2}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number is equal to the second number.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testeq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testeq}[2]{%
-\DTLifeq{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLiseq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLiseq}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testeq{#1}{#2}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number lies between second and third 
-% numbers. (End points included.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testclosedbetween}[3]{%
-\DTLifclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisclosedbetween}[3]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number lies between second and third 
-% numbers. (End points excluded.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testopenbetween}[3]{%
-\DTLifopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisopenbetween}[3]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number lies between second and third 
-% numbers. (End points included, all arguments are fixed point
-% numbers in standard format.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPclosedbetween}[3]{%
-\DTLifFPclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPclosedbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPclosedbetween}[3]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number lies between second and third 
-% numbers. (End points excluded, all arguments are fixed point
-% numbers in standard format.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPopenbetween}[3]{%
-\DTLifFPopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPopenbetween}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPopenbetween}[3]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number is less than second
-% number where both numbers are  in standard format.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPislt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPislt}[2]{%
-\FPiflt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPlt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPlt}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPislt{#1}{#2}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number is greater than second
-% number where both numbers are  in standard format.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPisgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPisgt}[2]{%
-\FPifgt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPgt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPgt}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPisgt{#1}{#2}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if two numbers are equal, where both numbers
-% are in standard decimal format
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPiseq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPiseq}[2]{%
-\FPifeq{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPeq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPeq}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPiseq{#1}{#2}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number is less than or equal to second
-% number where both numbers are in standard format.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPislteq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPislteq}[2]{%
-\FPiflt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi
-\if@dtl@condition
-\else
- \dtl@testFPiseq{#1}{#2}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPlteq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPlteq}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPislteq{#1}{#2}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if first number is greater than or equal to second
-% number where both numbers are  in standard format.
-% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPisgteq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPisgteq}[2]{%
-\FPifgt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi
-\if@dtl@condition
-\else
- \dtl@testFPiseq{#1}{#2}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPgteq}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisFPgteq}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPisgteq{#1}{#2}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%
-% Command to test if argument is a string. This sets
-% \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@teststring}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@teststring}[1]{%
-\DTLifstring{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisstring}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisstring}[1]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@teststring{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if argument is a numerical. This sets
-% \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testnumerical}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testnumerical}[1]{%
-\DTLifnumerical{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisnumerical}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisnumerical}[1]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testnumerical{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if argument is an integer. This sets
-% \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testint}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testint}[1]{%
-\DTLifint{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisint}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisint}[1]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testint{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Command to test if argument is a real. This sets
-% \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testreal}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testreal}[1]{%
-\DTLifreal{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLisreal}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLisreal}[1]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testreal{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-% Command to test if argument is a currency. This sets
-% \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testcurrency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testcurrency}[1]{%
-\DTLifcurrency{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLiscurrency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLiscurrency}[1]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testcurrency{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-% Command to test if argument is a currency with given unit. This sets
-% \cs{if@dtl@condition}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testcurrencyunit}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@testcurrencyunit}[2]{%
-\DTLifcurrencyunit{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLiscurrencyunit}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLiscurrencyunit}[2]{%
-\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testcurrencyunit{#1}{#2}%
-\noexpand\if@dtl@condition}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% 
-% \subsection{Defining New Databases}
-% A database is stored internally as a list of lists, where each list 
-% is a row of data. The data is stored as a comma separated list of 
-% \marg{id}\marg{value} pairs, where \meta{id} is an 
-% identifier 
-% and \meta{value} is the value. \cs{DTLnewdb}\marg{name} 
-% initialises a database called \meta{name}. The keys associated
-% with this database are stored in \cs{dtlkeys@}\meta{name}
-% A new count register \cs{dtlrows@}\meta{db name} is created.
-% This stores the total number of rows in the data base.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewdb}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLnewdb}[1]{%
-\DTLifdbexists{#1}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' already exists}{}}{%
-\dtl@message{Creating database `#1'}%
-\expandafter\gdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{}%
-\expandafter\gdef\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname{}%
-\expandafter\global\expandafter\newcount\csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLrowcount}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-% Number of rows in \meta{db name}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLrowcount}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLrowcount}[1]{%
-\expandafter\number\csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLifempty}\marg{name}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Check if named database is empty (i.e.\ no rows have been added.)
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifdbempty}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifdbempty}[3]{%
-\DTLifdbexists{#1}{%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname\@empty
- #2%
-\else
- #3%
-\fi}{%
-\PackageError{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}{}}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLnewrow}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-% Add a new row to named database.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLnewrow}[1]{%
-\DTLifdbempty{#1}{%
-  \expandafter\gdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{{}}%
-  \expandafter\global\expandafter\advance
-     \csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname by 1\relax
-  \dtl@message{New row added to database `#1'}%
-}{%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@olddb\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@olddb,{}}%
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{\the\toks@}%
-  \expandafter\global\expandafter\advance
-     \csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname by 1\relax
-  \dtl@message{New row added to database `#1'}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLnewdbentry}\marg{db name}\marg{id}\marg{value}.
-%\end{definition}
-% Add an entry to the last row (adds new row if database is empty.)
-%
-% When a new entry is added, the control sequence 
-% \cs{@dtl@idtype@}\meta{db name}\texttt{@}\meta{id} is checked. 
-% This keeps track of the type of all the entries with the given ID
-% for the given database. If this control
-% sequence doesn't exist, a new one is created, and set to the
-% relevant type: 0 (string), 1 (int) or 2 (real). If it exists,
-% then it is set as follows: if has a value of 0 (string), it
-% remains unchanged. If it has another value, then it is set to
-% 2 (real) if it was either 1 or 2 and \meta{value} is 2, it is
-% set to 1 if \meta{value} is 1, otherwise it remains unchanged.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewdbentry}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLnewdbentry}[3]{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#3}%
-\edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow
-% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@dbid{#2}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set up the correct entry format:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\edef\@dtl@dbentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If database is empty, add new row.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLifdbempty{#1}{\DTLnewrow{#1}}{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Add the entry to the last row of the database:
-% Split the database into the last row
-% (\cs{@dtl@dblastrow}), and everything except the last row
-% (\cs{@dtl@dbrest}.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\dtl@choplast\expandafter{%
-\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname}{\@dtl@dbrest}{\@dtl@dblastrow}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Check if the last row already contains an entry with this ID.
-% If so, generate an error, otherwise append this entry to the
-% row, and reconstruct database list.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dtl@ifrowcontains{#2}{\@dtl@dblastrow}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Can't add entry with ID `#2' to current
-row of database `#1'}{There is already an entry with this ID on
-the current row}}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Append entry to last row
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dbentry}%
-\ifthenelse{\equal{}{\@dtl@dblastrow}}{%
-  \edef\@dtl@dblastrow{\the\@dtl@toks}%
-}{%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@dblastrow}%
-  \edef\@dtl@dblastrow{\the\toks@,\the\@dtl@toks}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Reconstruct list.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dblastrow}%
-\ifthenelse{\equal{}{\@dtl@dbrest}}{%
-  \expandafter\long\expandafter\xdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{%
-    {\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-}{%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@dbrest}%
-  \expandafter\long\expandafter\xdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{%
-    \the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the keys
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@dtl@setidtype{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@setkeys\expandafter{#2}{#1}%
-}%
-\dtl@message{Added #2\space -> #3\space to database `#1'}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@setidtype}\marg{db name}\marg{id}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-% Set the type for \meta{id} according to \meta{value}.
-% If \meta{value} is empty, leave \cs{@dtl@idtype}\meta{id}
-% unchanged (if defined) or define as empty if not defined.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@setidtype}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\@dtl@setidtype}[3]{%
-\@dtl@checknumerical{#3}%
-\def\@dtl@value{#3}%
-\@ifundefined{@dtl@idtype@#1@#2}{%
-\ifx\@dtl@value\@empty
- \expandafter\gdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{}%
-\else
- \expandafter\xdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{%
-   \the\@dtl@datatype}%
-\fi
-}{%
-\ifx\@dtl@value\@empty
-\else
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname\@empty
-    \expandafter\xdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{%
-      \the\@dtl@datatype}%
-  \else
-    \expandafter\@dtl@tmpcount\expandafter=
-      \csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname
-    \ifcase\@dtl@tmpcount
-      % string, leave as it is
-    \or
-      % int, set to whatever \@dtl@datatype is
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{%
-        \the\@dtl@datatype}%
-    \or
-      % real, set to real unless <value> is a string
-      \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-        \expandafter\gdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{0}%
-      \else
-        \expandafter\gdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{2}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro} 
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{@dtl@setkeys}\marg{key}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-% Adds \marg{key} to \cs{dtlkeys@}\meta{db name} if not already
-% in it.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@setkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@setkeys}[2]{%
-\edef\@dtl@tmp{\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname\@empty
-   \expandafter\gdef\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname{#1}%
-\else
-  \@for\dtl@key:=\@dtl@tmp\do{%
-  \ifthenelse{\equal{\dtl@key}{#1}}{\@endfortrue}{}%
-  }%
-  \if@endfor
-  \else
-   \expandafter\xdef\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname{\the\@dtl@toks,#1}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@getidtype}\marg{db name}\marg{id}
-%\end{definition}
-% Get the data type for \meta{id} in given database.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@getidtype}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@getidtype}[2]{%
-\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLifdbexists}\marg{db name}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Check if a data base with the given name exists:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifdbexists}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLifdbexists}[3]{%
-\@ifundefined{dtldb@#1}{#3}{#2}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@ifrowcontains}\meta{id}\meta{cmd}\meta{true part}\meta{false
-%part}
-%\end{definition}
-% Check to see if the row given by \meta{cmd} contains an
-% entry with ID given by \meta{id}. If true, do \meta{true part},
-% otherwise do \meta{false part}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@ifrowcontains}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\dtl@ifrowcontains}[4]{%
-\@for\@dtl@element:=#2\do{%
-\dtl@getentryid{\@dtl@element}{\@dtl@entryid}%
-\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@dtl@entryid}}{\@endfortrue}{}%
-}%
-\if@endfor #3\else #4\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@getentryid}\meta{entry cmd}\meta{id cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Get the ID for an entry given by \meta{entry cmd}, and stores in
-% in \meta{id cmd}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@getentryid}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@getentryid}[2]{\expandafter\@dtl@getentryid#1#2}
-\long\def\@dtl@getentryid#1#2#3{\def#3{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@getentryvalue}\meta{entry cmd}\meta{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Stores the entry value in \meta{cmd} for
-% entry given by \meta{entry cmd}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@getentryvalue}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@getentryvalue}[2]{%
-\expandafter\@dtl@getentryvalue#1#2}
-\long\def\@dtl@getentryvalue#1#2#3{\gdef#3{#2}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLforeach} can only be nested up to three levels.
-% \cs{dtlforeachlevel} keeps track of the current level.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtlforeachlevel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\global\newcount\dtlforeachlevel
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The counter DTLrow\meta{n} keeps track of each row of data during
-% the \meta{n} nested \cs{DTLforeach}. It is only incremented in the 
-% conditions (given by the optional argument) are met.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{DTLrowi}
-\newcounter{DTLrowii}
-\newcounter{DTLrowiii}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Keep \sty{hyperref} happy
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{DTLrow}
-\newcommand*{\theHDTLrow}{\arabic{DTLrow}}
-\newcommand*{\theHDTLrowi}{\theHDTLrow.\arabic{DTLrowi}}
-\newcommand*{\theHDTLrowii}{\theHDTLrowi.\arabic{DTLrowii}}
-\newcommand*{\theHDTLrowiii}{\theHDTLrowii.\arabic{DTLrowiii}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsavelastrowcount}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Stores the maximum row count for the last \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsaverowcount}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsavelastrowcount}[1]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel>2\relax
-  \def#1{0}%
-\else
-  \ifnum\dtlforeachlevel<0\relax
-    \def#1{0}%
-  \else
-    \@dtl@tmpcount=\dtlforeachlevel
-    \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-    \edef#1{\expandafter\number
-      \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\@dtl@tmpcount\endcsname}%
-  \fi
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLforeach}\oarg{conditions}\marg{db name}\marg{values}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-% For each row of data in the database given by \meta{db name},
-% do \meta{text}, if the specified conditions are satisfied.
-% The argument \marg{values} is a comma separated list of
-% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. At the start of each row,
-% each of the commands in this list are set to the value of the
-% entry with the corresponding key \meta{key}.
-% (\cs{gdef} is used to ensure \cs{DTLforeach} works in a tabular
-% environment.) The database is reconstructed to allow for
-% rows to be edited.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLforeach}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLforeach}[4][\boolean{true}]{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Check database exists
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLifdbexists{#2}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Keep \sty{hyperref} happy
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\refstepcounter{DTLrow}%
-\global\c@DTLrow=\c@DTLrow
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store database name
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\gdef\@dtl@dbname{#2}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Increment level and check not exceeded 3
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\global\advance\dtlforeachlevel by 1\relax
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel>3\relax
-  \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLforeach\space nested too
-deeply}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set level dependent information (needs to be global to ensure
-% it works in the \env{tabular} environment.) Row counter:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\global
-    \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname = 0\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Construct updated database:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let
-    \csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-      =\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Database name:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\global\expandafter\let
-    \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-      =\@dtl@dbname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through each row
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname%
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set current row macro for this level
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\global\expandafter
-    \let\csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel
-        \endcsname=\@dtl@currentrow
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Assign commands to the required entries
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifx\relax#3\relax
-  \else
-    \@dtl@assign{#3}%
-  \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Do the main body of text if condition is satisfied
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifthenelse{#1}{%
-  \refstepcounter{DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel}%
-  \expandafter\edef\expandafter\DTLcurrentindex\expandafter
-    {\arabic{DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel}}%
-  #4%
-  }{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Reconstruct database
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thiscurrentrow
-    \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Don't add this row if it is now empty
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifx\@dtl@thiscurrentrow\@empty
-  \else
-    \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@thiscurrentrow}%
-    \expandafter
-    \ifx
-      \csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-       \@empty
-      \expandafter
-        \xdef\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-    \else
-      \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@foreachrows\expandafter
-        =\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-      \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@foreachrows}%
-      \expandafter
-      \xdef\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\@endforfalse
-}%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@foreachrows\expandafter
-    =\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-\expandafter\global
-  \expandafter\let\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname=\@dtl@foreachrows
-\fi
-\global\advance\dtlforeachlevel by -1\relax
-}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#2' doesn't exist}{}}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLappendtorow}\marg{key}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-% Appends entry to current row. (The current row is given by
-% \cs{@dtl@thiscurrentrow@}\meta{n} where \meta{n} is roman
-% numeral value of \cs{dtlforeachlevel}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLappendtorow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLappendtorow}[2]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLappendtorow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisdb} to the current database name:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisdb
-    \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#2}%
-  \edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow
-% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\@dtl@dbid{#1}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set up the correct entry format:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\@dtl@dbentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Check if there is already an entry with this key
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \dtl@ifrowcontains{#1}{\@dtl@thisrow}{%
-  \PackageError{datatool}{Can't add entry with ID `#1' to current
-  row of database `\@dtl@thisdb'}{There is already an entry with 
-  this ID on the current row}}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Append entry to last row
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dbentry}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@thisrow\@empty
-    \expandafter
-     \xdef\csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{\the\@dtl@toks}%
-  \else
-    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thisrow}%
-    \expandafter
-     \xdef\csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{\the\toks@,\the\@dtl@toks}%
-  \fi
-  }
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Update key list
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \@dtl@setidtype{\@dtl@thisdb}{#1}{#2}%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@setkeys\expandafter{#1}{\@dtl@thisdb}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% end the \cs{ifnum}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLremoveentryfromrow}\marg{key}
-%\end{definition}
-% Removes entry given by \meta{key} from current row. 
-% (The current row is given by
-% \cs{@dtl@thiscurrentrow@}\meta{n} where \meta{n} is roman
-% numeral value of \cs{dtlforeachlevel}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLremoveentryfromrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLremoveentryfromrow}[1]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLremoveentryfromrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisdb} to the current database name:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisdb
-    \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Check row contains an entry with this key
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \dtl@ifrowcontains{#1}{\@dtl@thisrow}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Split row list
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \let\@dtl@pre=\@empty
-   \@for\dtl@thisentry:=\@dtl@thisrow\do{%
-     \dtl@getentryid\dtl@thisentry\@dtl@id
-     \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@id}{#1}}{%
-     }{%
-       \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@thisentry}%
-       \ifx\@dtl@pre\@empty
-         \edef\@dtl@pre{{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-       \else
-         \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@pre}%
-         \edef\@dtl@pre{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-       \fi
-     }
-   }%
-  \expandafter\let
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-    =\@dtl@pre
-  }{%
-    \PackageError{datatool}{Can't remove entry given by key `#1'
-     from current row in database `\@dtl@thisdb', no such entry}{}%
-  }%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLreplaceentryforrow}\marg{key}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-% Replaces entry given by \meta{key} in current row with 
-% \meta{value}. 
-% (The current row is given by
-% \cs{@dtl@thiscurrentrow@}\meta{n} where \meta{n} is roman
-% numeral value of \cs{dtlforeachlevel}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLreplaceentryforrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLreplaceentryforrow}[2]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLreplaceentryforrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisdb} to the current database name:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisdb
-    \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#2}%
-  \edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow
-% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\@dtl@dbid{#1}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set up the correct entry format:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\dtl@newentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Check row contains an entry with this key
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \dtl@ifrowcontains{#1}{\@dtl@thisrow}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Split row list
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \let\@dtl@pre=\@empty
-   \@for\dtl@thisentry:=\@dtl@thisrow\do{%
-     \dtl@getentryid\dtl@thisentry\@dtl@id
-     \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@id}{#1}}{%
-       \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@newentry}%
-     }{%
-       \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@thisentry}%
-     }
-     \ifx\@dtl@pre\@empty
-       \edef\@dtl@pre{{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-     \else
-       \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@pre}%
-       \edef\@dtl@pre{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-     \fi
-   }%
-  \expandafter\let
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-    =\@dtl@pre
-  }{%
-    \PackageError{datatool}{Can't remove entry given by key `#1'
-     from current row in database `\@dtl@thisdb', no such entry}{}%
-  }%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLremovecurrentrow}
-%\end{definition}
-% Removes current row. This just sets the current row to empty
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLremoveentryfromrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLremovecurrentrow}[1]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLremovecurrentrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set current row to empty.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-     =\@empty
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLforeachkeyinrow}\marg{cmd}\marg{text}
-%\end{definition}
-% Iterates through each key in the row, and does \meta{text}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLforeachkeyinrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLforeachkeyinrow}[2]{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLforeachkeyinrow\space can only
- be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow
-   \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through the row
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \@for\dtl@thisentry:=\@dtl@thisrow\do{%
-     \dtl@getentryvalue\dtl@thisentry{#1}%
-     #2%
-   }%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLaddentryforrow}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list}\marg{condition}\marg{key}\marg{value}
-%\end{definition}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLaddentryforrow}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLaddentryforrow}[5]{%
-\gdef\@dtl@dbname{#1}%
-\DTLifdbexists{#1}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#5}%
-  \edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow
-% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\@dtl@dbid{#4}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set up the correct entry format:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\@dtl@dbentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store the database in \cs{@dtl@db}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \expandafter
-    \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname%
-  \let\@dtl@prerow=\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%  Iterate through each row of the database
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-  \@dtl@assign{#2}%
-  \ifthenelse{#3}{%
-    \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dbentry}%
-    \ifx\@dtl@currentrow\@empty
-      \edef\@dtl@currentrow{{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-    \else
-      \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-      \edef\@dtl@currentrow{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-    \fi
-    \@endfortrue
-  }{%
-  }%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@prerow\@empty
-    \edef\@dtl@prerow{{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-  \else
-    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@prerow}%
-    \edef\@dtl@prerow{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-  \fi
-}%
-\if@endfor
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@forremainder}%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@prerow}%
-  \edef\@dtl@prerow{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}%
-  \expandafter\global\expandafter
-    \let\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname=\@dtl@prerow
-\else
-  \PackageError{datatool}{Unable to add `#5' for key `#4' - condition
-    not met for any row in database `#1'}{}%
-\fi
-\@endforfalse
-}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{@dtl@assign}\marg{values} assigns each command in 
-% \meta{values} (see above) to the value of the corresponding
-% ID for the row given by \cs{@dtl@currentrow}.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@assign}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@assign}[1]{%
-\@dtl@assigncmd#1,\relax\@@
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{\@dtl@assigncmd}\meta{cmd}=\meta{id}\cs{@nil}
-%\end{definition}
-% Assign \meta{cmd} to value given by \meta{id}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@assigncmd}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@assigncmd#1=#2,#3\@@{%
-\@for\@dtl@entry:=\@dtl@currentrow\do{%
-\dtl@getentryid\@dtl@entry\@dtl@id
-\ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@id}{#2}}{%
-\dtl@getentryvalue\@dtl@entry#1%
-\@endfortrue}{}%
-}%
-\if@endfor
-\else
- \@dtl@setnull{#1}{#2}%
-\fi
-\@endforfalse
-\ifx\relax#3%
- \let\@dtl@next=\@dtl@assigncmdnoop
-\else
- \let\@dtl@next=\@dtl@assigncmd
-\fi
-\@dtl@next#3\@@
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% End loop
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@assigncmdnoop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@assigncmdnoop#1\@@{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{@dtl@setnull}\marg{cmd}\marg{id} sets \meta{cmd} to either
-% NULL or 0 depending on the data type for \meta{id}. (Database
-% name should be stored in \cs{@dtl@dbname} prior to use.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@setnull}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@setnull}[2]{%
-\@ifundefined{@dtl@idtype@\@dtl@dbname @#2}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Key `#2' not defined in database
-`\@dtl@dbname'}{}}{%
-\edef\@dtl@tmp{0\@dtl@getidtype{\@dtl@dbname}{#2}}%
-\expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmp=0\relax
-  \gdef#1{NULL}%
-\else
-  \gdef#1{0}%
-\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@gathervalues}\marg{db name}\marg{row}
-%\end{definition}
-% Stores each element of \meta{row} in \meta{db name} into 
-% the command \cs{@dtl@key@}\meta{key}, where \meta{key} is the
-% key for that element.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@gathervalues}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\dtl@gathervalues}[2]{%
-\edef\@dtl@tmp{\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}%
-\def\@dtl@list{}%
-\@for\dtl@key:=\@dtl@tmp\do{%
- \expandafter\@dtl@setnull\expandafter{%
-   \csname @dtl@key@\dtl@key\endcsname}{\dtl@key}%
- \@for\dtl@thiselement:=#2\do{%
-  \dtl@getentryid\dtl@thiselement\@dtl@id
-  \DTLifstringeq{\@dtl@id}{\dtl@key}{%
-  \dtl@getentryvalue\dtl@thiselement\@dtl@value%
-  \expandafter\protected@edef\csname @dtl@key@\dtl@key\endcsname{\@dtl@value}%
-  \@endfortrue}{}%
- }%
-\@endforfalse
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsumforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sums all entries for key \meta{key} over all databases listed
-% in \meta{db list},
-% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsumforkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsumforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and
-\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{%
-\def#4{0}%
-\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{%
-  \expandafter
-    \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname%
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-    \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-    \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{%
-      \protected@edef\DTLthisval{%
-           \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-      \ifthenelse{#1}{\DTLadd{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}}{}%
-  }}%
-  }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}%
-  }%
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmeanforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the arithmetic mean of all entries for each key in 
-% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list},
-% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmeanforkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmeanforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and
-\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{%
-\def#4{0}%
-\def\dtl@n{0}%
-\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{%
-\DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{%
-  \expandafter
-    \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname%
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-    \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-    \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{%
-      \protected@edef\DTLthisval{%
-         \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-      \ifthenelse{#1}{%
-        \DTLadd{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}%
-        \DTLadd{\dtl@n}{\dtl@n}{1}%
-    }{}%
-  }}%
-}{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}}}%
-\ifnum\dtl@n=0\relax
- \PackageError{datatool}{Can't compute mean, no data!}{}%
-\else
-  \DTLdiv{#4}{#4}{\dtl@n}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLvarianceforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the variance of all entries for each key in 
-% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list},
-% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLvarianceforkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLvarianceforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and
-\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{%
-\DTLmeanforkeys[#1]{#2}{#3}{\dtl@mean}%
-\def#4{0}%
-\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{%
-  \expandafter
-    \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-    \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-    \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{%
-      \protected@edef\DTLthisval{%
-           \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-      \ifthenelse{#1}{%
-        \DTLsub{\dtl@diff}{\DTLthisval}{\dtl@mean}%
-        \DTLmul{\dtl@diff}{\dtl@diff}{\dtl@diff}%
-        \DTLadd{#4}{#4}{\dtl@diff}%
-      }{}%
-  }}%
-  }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}%
-  }%
-}%
-\ifnum\dtl@n=0\relax
-  \PackageError{datatool}{Can't compute variance, no data!}{}%
-\else
-  \DTLdiv{#4}{#4}{\dtl@n}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsdforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the standard deviation of all entries for each key in 
-% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list},
-% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsdforkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsdforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and
-\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{%
-\DTLvarianceforkeys[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-\DTLsqrt{#4}{#4}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLminforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determines the minimum over all entries for each key in 
-% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list},
-% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLminforkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLminforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and
-\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{%
-\def#4{}%
-\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{%
-\DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{%
-  \expandafter
-    \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname%
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-    \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-    \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{%
-      \protected@edef\DTLthisval{%
-         \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-      \ifthenelse{#1}{%
-        \ifx#4\@empty
-          \let#4=\DTLthisval
-        \else
-          \DTLmin{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}%
-        \fi
-    }{}%
-}}%
-  }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}%
-  }%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmaxforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Determines the maximum over all entries for each key in 
-% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list},
-% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmaxforkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmaxforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and
-\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{%
-\def#4{}%
-\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{%
-\DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{%
-  \expandafter
-    \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname%
-  \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-    \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-    \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{%
-      \protected@edef\DTLthisval{%
-         \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-      \ifthenelse{#1}{%
-        \ifx#4\@empty
-          \let#4=\DTLthisval
-        \else
-          \DTLmax{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}%
-        \fi
-    }{}%
-}}%
-  }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}%
-  }%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLcomputebounds}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{x key}\marg{y key}\marg{minX cmd}\marg{minY cmd}\marg{maxX cmd}\marg{maxY cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the maximum and minimum $x$ and $y$ values over all
-% the databases listed in \meta{db list} where the $x$ value
-% is given by \meta{x key} and the $y$ value is given by 
-% \meta{y key}. The results are stored in \meta{minX cmd},
-% \meta{minY cmd}, \meta{maxX cmd} and \meta{maxY cmd} in 
-% standard decimal format.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLcomputebounds}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLcomputebounds}[8][\boolean{true}]{%
-\let#5=\relax
-\let#6=\relax
-\let#7=\relax
-\let#8=\relax
-\@for\dtl@thisdb:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLforeach[#1]{\dtl@thisdb}{\DTLthisX=#3,\DTLthisY=#4}{%
-    \DTLconverttodecimal{\DTLthisX}{\dtl@decx}%
-    \DTLconverttodecimal{\DTLthisY}{\dtl@decy}%
-    \ifx#5\relax
-      \let#5=\dtl@decx
-      \let#6=\dtl@decy
-      \let#7=\dtl@decx
-      \let#8=\dtl@decy
-    \else
-      \FPmin{#5}{#5}{\dtl@decx}%
-      \FPmin{#6}{#6}{\dtl@decy}%
-      \FPmax{#7}{#7}{\dtl@decx}%
-      \FPmax{#8}{#8}{\dtl@decy}%
-    \fi
-  }%
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsort}\marg{sort criteria}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sorts database \meta{db name} according to \marg{sort criteria},
-% which must be a comma separated list of keys, and optionally
-% \texttt{=}\meta{order}, where \meta{order} is either
-% "ascending" or "descending".
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsort}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsort}[2]{%
-\edef\@dtl@sortorder{#1}%
-\edef\@dtl@dbname{#2}%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@list{\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname}%
-\dtl@sortlist{\@dtl@list}{\@dtl@sortcriteria}%
-\expandafter\global\expandafter
-  \let\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname=\@dtl@list}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@sortcriteria}\marg{a}\marg{b}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sort criteria. \cs{@dtl@currentrow} and
-% \cs{@dtl@sortorder} must be set before use.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@sortcriteria}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\@dtl@sortcriteria}[2]{%
-\@for\@dtl@level:=\@dtl@sortorder\do{%
- \expandafter\@dtl@getsortdirection\@dtl@level=\relax%
- \dtl@compare{\@dtl@key}{#1}{#2}%
- \multiply\dtl@sortresult by \@dtl@sortdirection\relax
- \ifnum\dtl@sortresult=0\relax
- \else
-  \@endfortrue
- \fi
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Get the direction from either \meta{key} or
-% \meta{key}=\meta{direction}. Sets \cs{@dtl@sortdirection} to
-% either -1 (ascending) or 1 (descending).
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@getsortdirection}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@getsortdirection#1=#2\relax{%
-\def\@dtl@key{#1}%
-\def\@dtl@sortdirection{#2}%
-\ifx\@dtl@sortdirection\@empty
- \def\@dtl@sortdirection{-1}%
-\else
- \@dtl@get@sortdirection#2%
- \DTLifstringeq{\@dtl@sortdirection}{ascending}{%
- \def\@dtl@sortdirection{-1}}{%
-  \DTLifstringeq{\@dtl@sortdirection}{descending}{%
-   \def\@dtl@sortdirection{1}}{%
-   \PackageError{datatool}{Invalid sort direction 
-    `\@dtl@sortdirection'}{%
-    The sort direction can only be one of `ascending' or
-    `descending'}\def\@dtl@sortdirection{-1}}}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Get direction
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@sortdirection}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@get@sortdirection#1={\def\@dtl@sortdirection{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@compare}\marg{key}\marg{a}\marg{b}
-%\end{definition}
-% Compare \meta{a} and \meta{b} according to \meta{key} of
-% database given by \cs{@dtl@dbname}. Sets \cs{dtl@sortresult}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@compare}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\dtl@compare}[3]{%
-\protected@edef\dtl@arga{#2}\protected@edef\dtl@argb{#3}%
-\dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\dtl@arga}%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@a{\csname @dtl@key@#1\endcsname}%
-\dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\dtl@argb}%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@b{\csname @dtl@key@#1\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@datatype\expandafter=
- \csname @dtl@idtype@\@dtl@dbname @#1\endcsname\relax
-\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax
-  \edef\@dtl@result{\noexpand\compare{\@dtl@a}{\@dtl@b}}%
-  \expandafter\dtl@sortresult\expandafter=\@dtl@result\relax
-\else
-  \DTLifnumlt{\@dtl@a}{\@dtl@b}{\dtl@sortresult=-1\relax}{%
-  \DTLifnumgt{\@dtl@a}{\@dtl@b}{\dtl@sortresult=1\relax}{%
-  \dtl@sortresult=0\relax}}% 
-\fi
-\dtl@message{`\@dtl@a' <=> `\@dtl@b' = \number\dtl@sortresult}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\subsection{General List Utilities}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@choplast}\marg{list}\marg{rest}\marg{last}
-%\end{definition}
-% Chop the last element off a comma separated list, putting the
-% last element in the control sequence \meta{last} and putting
-% the rest in the control sequence \meta{rest}. The control
-% sequence \meta{list} is unchanged. If the list is empty, both
-% \meta{last} and \meta{rest} will be empty.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@choplast}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@choplast}[3]{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \meta{rest} to empty:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let#2\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set \meta{last} to empty:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let#3\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through \meta{list}:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@for\@dtl@element:=#1\do{%
-\ifx#3\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% First iteration, don't set \meta{rest}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \ifx#2\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Second iteration, set \meta{rest} to \meta{last} (which is
-% currently set to the previous value:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#3}%
-   \edef#2{{\the\toks@}}% 
- \else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Subsequent iterations, set \meta{rest} to \meta{rest},\meta{last}
-% (\meta{last} is currently set to the previous value):
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#3}%
-   \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#2}%
-   \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks,{\the\toks@}}%
- \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Now set \meta{last} to current element.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let#3=\@dtl@element%
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@chopfirst}\marg{list}\marg{first}\marg{rest}
-%\end{definition}
-% Chop first element off \meta{list} and store in \meta{first}.
-% The remainder of the list is stored in \meta{rest}. (\meta{list}
-% remains unchanged.)
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@chopfirst}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@chopfirst}[3]{%
-\let#2=\@empty
-\let#3=\@empty
-\@for\@dtl@element:=#1\do{%
- \let#2=\@dtl@element
- \@endfortrue
-}%
-\if@endfor
- \let#3=\@forremainder
-\fi
-\@endforfalse
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@sortlist}\marg{list}\marg{criteria cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Performs an insertion sort on \meta{list}, where \meta{criteria cmd}
-% is a macro which takes two arguments \meta{a} and \meta{b}.
-% \meta{criteria cmd} must set the count register \cs{dtl@sortresult}
-% to either -1 (\meta{a} less than \meta{b}), 0 (\meta{a} is
-% equal to \meta{b}) or 1 (\meta{a} is greater than \meta{b}.)
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@sortlist}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\dtl@sortlist}[2]{%
-\def\@dtl@sortedlist{}%
-\@for\@dtl@currentrow:=#1\do{%
-\dtl@insertinto{\@dtl@currentrow}{\@dtl@sortedlist}{#2}%
-\@endforfalse}%
-\let#1=\@dtl@sortedlist
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@insertinto}\marg{element}\marg{sorted-list}\marg{criteria cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Inserts \meta{element} into the sorted list \meta{sorted-list}
-% according to the criteria given by \meta{criteria cmd} (see above.)
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@insertinto}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newtoks\@dtl@toks
-\newcommand{\dtl@insertinto}[3]{%
-\def\@dtl@newsortedlist{}%
-\@dtl@insertdonefalse
-\@for\dtl@srtelement:=#2\do{%
-\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@newsortedlist}%
-\if@dtl@insertdone
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@newstuff{{\dtl@srtelement}}%
-\else
-  \expandafter#3\expandafter{\dtl@srtelement}{#1}%
-  \ifnum\dtl@sortresult<0\relax
-    \protected@edef\@dtl@newstuff{{#1},{\dtl@srtelement}}%
-    \@dtl@insertdonetrue
-  \else
-    \protected@edef\@dtl@newstuff{{\dtl@srtelement}}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\@dtl@newsortedlist\@empty
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{\@dtl@newstuff}%
-\else
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@newsortedlist}%
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{\the\toks@,\@dtl@newstuff}%
-\fi
-\@endforfalse
-}%
- \ifx\@dtl@newsortedlist\@empty
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{{#1}}%
- \else
-   \if@dtl@insertdone
-   \else
-     \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@newsortedlist}%
-     \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{\the\toks@,{#1}}%
-   \fi
- \fi
-\global\let#2=\@dtl@newsortedlist
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define conditional to indicate whether the new entry has
-% been inserted into the sorted list.
-%\begin{macro}{\if@dtl@insertdone}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@dtl@insertdone
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define \cs{dtl@sortresult} to be set by comparision macro.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@sortresult}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\dtl@sortresult
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Floating Point Arithmetic}
-% The commands defined in this section all use the equivalent
-% commands provided by the \sty{fp} package, but first convert
-% the decimal number into the required format.
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLadd}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} + \meta{num2}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLadd}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLadd}[3]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\FPadd{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgadd}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgadd}[3]{%
-\DTLadd{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sums all the values in \meta{num list} and stores in
-% \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLaddall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLaddall}[2]{%
-\def\@dtl@sum{0}%
-\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@sum}{\@dtl@sum}{\@dtl@num}%
-}
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@sum}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@sum}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgaddall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgaddall}[2]{%
-\DTLaddall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsub}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} - \meta{num2}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsub}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsub}[3]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\FPsub{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgsub}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgsub}[3]{%
-\DTLsub{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLmul}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} * \meta{num2}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmul}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmul}[3]{%
-\let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@empty
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-\else
-  \let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@dtl@replaced
-\fi
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-\else
-  \let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@dtl@replaced
-\fi
-\FPmul{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\ifx\@dtl@thisreplaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmul}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgmul}[3]{%
-\DTLmul{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLdiv}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} / \meta{num2}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdiv}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdiv}[3]{%
-\let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@empty
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-\else
-  \let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@dtl@replaced
-\fi
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\FPdiv{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\ifx\@dtl@thisreplaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \ifx\@dtl@thisreplaced\@dtl@replaced
-    \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-  \else
-    \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgdiv}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgdiv}[3]{%
-\DTLdiv{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLabs}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = abs(\meta{num})
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLabs}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLabs}[2]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\FPabs{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgabs}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgabs}[2]{%
-\DTLabs{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLneg}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = -\meta{num}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLneg}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLneg}[2]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\FPneg{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgneg}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgneg}[2]{%
-\DTLneg{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsqrt}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = sqrt(\meta{num})
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsqrt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsqrt}[2]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\FProot{\@dtl@tmpi}{\@dtl@numi}{2}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmpi}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmpi}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgsqrt}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgsqrt}[2]{%
-\DTLsqrt{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLmin}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = min(\meta{num1}, \meta{num2})
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmin}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmin}[3]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\FPiflt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
- \dtl@ifsingle{#2}{%
-  \let#1=#2}{%
-  \def#1{#2}}%
-\else
- \dtl@ifsingle{#3}{%
-  \let#1=#3}{%
-  \def#1{#3}}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmin}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgmin}[3]{%
-\DTLmin{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Finds the minimum value in \meta{num list} and stores in
-% \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLminall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLminall}[2]{%
-\let\@dtl@min=\@empty
-\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@min\@empty
-    \let\@dtl@min=\@dtl@num
-  \else
-    \FPmin{\@dtl@min}{\@dtl@min}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \fi
-}
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@min}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@min}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgminall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgminall}[2]{%
-\DTLminall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLmax}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} = max(\meta{num1}, \meta{num2})
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmax}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmax}[3]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\FPmax{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
-\FPifgt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}%
- \dtl@ifsingle{#2}{%
-  \let#1=#2}{%
-  \def#1{#2}}%
-\else
- \dtl@ifsingle{#3}{%
-  \let#1=#3}{%
-  \def#1{#3}}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmax}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgmax}[3]{%
-\DTLmax{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Finds the maximum value in \meta{num list} and stores in
-% \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmaxall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmaxall}[2]{%
-\let\@dtl@max=\@empty
-\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@max\@empty
-    \let\@dtl@max\@dtl@num
-  \else
-    \FPmax{\@dtl@max}{\@dtl@max}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \fi
-}
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@max}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@max}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmaxall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgmaxall}[2]{%
-\DTLmaxall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the arithmetic mean of all the values in \meta{num list} 
-% and stores in \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmeanforall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmeanforall}[2]{%
-\def\@dtl@mean{0}%
-\def\@dtl@n{0}%
-\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@n}{\@dtl@n}{1}%
-}
-\FPdiv{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@n}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@mean}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@mean}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmeanforall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgmeanforall}[2]{%
-\DTLmeanforall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the variance of all the values in \meta{num list} 
-% and stores in \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLvarianceforall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLvarianceforall}[2]{%
-\def\@dtl@mean{0}%
-\def\@dtl@n{0}%
-\let\@dtl@decvals=\@empty
-\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@decvals\@empty
-   \let\@dtl@decvals=\@dtl@num
-  \else
-   \edef\@dtl@decvals{\@dtl@decvals,\@dtl@num}%
-  \fi
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@n}{\@dtl@n}{1}%
-}
-\FPdiv{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@n}%
-\def\@dtl@var{0}%
-\@for\dtl@num:=\@dtl@decvals\do{%
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@mean}%
-  \FPmul{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@diff}%
-}
-\FPdiv{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@n}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@var}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@var}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgvarianceforall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgvarianceforall}[2]{%
-\DTLvarianceforall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Computes the standard deviation of all the values in \meta{num list} 
-% and stores in \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsdforall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsdforall}[2]{%
-\def\@dtl@mean{0}%
-\def\@dtl@n{0}%
-\let\@dtl@decvals=\@empty
-\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{%
-  \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \ifx\@dtl@decvals\@empty
-   \let\@dtl@decvals=\@dtl@num
-  \else
-   \edef\@dtl@decvals{\@dtl@decvals,\@dtl@num}%
-  \fi
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@num}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@n}{\@dtl@n}{1}%
-}
-\FPdiv{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@n}%
-\def\@dtl@sd{0}%
-\@for\dtl@num:=\@dtl@decvals\do{%
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@num}{\@dtl@mean}%
-  \FPmul{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@diff}%
-}
-\FPdiv{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@n}%
-\FProot{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@sd}{2}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@sd}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@sd}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgsdforall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgsdforall}[2]{%
-\DTLsdforall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLround}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} rounded to \meta{num digits}
-% digits after the decimal character.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLround}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLround}[3]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\FPround{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{#3}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLground}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLground}[3]{%
-\DTLround{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLtrunc}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} truncated to \meta{num digits}
-% digits after the decimal character.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLtrunc}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLtrunc}[3]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\FPtrunc{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{#3}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgtrunc}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgtrunc}[3]{%
-\DTLtrunc{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLclip}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}
-%\end{definition}
-% Sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} with all unnecessary 0's removed.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLclip}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLclip}[2]{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\FPclip{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}%
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\else
-  \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Global version
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgclip}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgclip}[3]{%
-\DTLclip{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}%
-\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\subsection{String Macros}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLinitials}\marg{string}
-%\end{definition}
-% Convert a string into initials.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLinitials}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLinitials}[1]{%
-\def\dtl@initialscmd{}%
-\protected@edef\dtl@string{#1}%
-\expandafter\dtl@initials\dtl@string{} \@nil
-\dtl@initialscmd}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLstoreinitials}\marg{string}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Convert a string into initials and store in \meta{cmd}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLstoreinitials}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLstoreinitials}[2]{%
-\def\dtl@initialscmd{}%
-\protected@edef\dtl@string{#1}%
-\expandafter\dtl@initials\dtl@string{} \@nil
-\let#2=\dtl@initialscmd
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@initials}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@initials#1#2 #3{%
-\def\dtl@tmp{#3}%
-\dtl@initialshyphen#2-{}\dtl@endhyp
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@initialscmd}%
-\toks@{#1}%
-\ifx\dtl@inithyphen\@empty
-\else
-  \edef\dtl@initialscmd{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@}%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@initialscmd}%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@inithyphen}%
-\fi
-\ifx\@nnil\dtl@tmp
- \edef\dtl@initialscmd{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@\DTLafterinitials}%
- \let\dtl@initialsnext=\@gobble
-\else
- \edef\dtl@initialscmd{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@\DTLbetweeninitials}%
- \let\dtl@initialsnext=\dtl@initials
-\fi
-\dtl@initialsnext#3}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@initialshyphen}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@initialshyphen#1-#2#3\dtl@endhyp{%
-\def\dtl@inithyphen{#2}%
-\ifx\dtl@inithyphen\@empty
-\else
- \edef\dtl@inithyphen{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen-#2}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define what to do after the final initial:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLafterinitials}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLafterinitials}{.}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define what to do between initials:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbetweeninitials}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbetweeninitials}{.}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define what to do before a hyphen:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen}{.}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifAllUpperCase}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifAllUpperCase}[3]{%
-\protected@edef\dtl@tuc{#1}%
-\expandafter\dtl@testifuppercase\dtl@tuc\@nil\relax
-\if@dtl@condition#2\else#3\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testifalluppercase}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@testifuppercase#1#2{%
-\def\dtl@argi{#1}%
-\def\dtl@argii{#2}%
-\def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-\ifx\dtl@argi\@nnil
-  \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\@nnil
-\else
-  \ifx#1\protect
-    \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifuppercase
-  \else
-    \ifx\uppercase#1\relax
-      \@dtl@conditiontrue
-      \def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-      \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\relax
-    \else
-      \edef\dtl@tc@arg{\string#1}%
-      \expandafter\dtl@test@ifuppercase\dtl@tc@arg\end
-      \ifx\dtl@argii\@nnil
-        \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\dtl@testifuppernext\relax
- \edef\dtl@dotestifuppernext{%
-   \noexpand\dtl@testifuppercase}%
-\else
- \ifx\dtl@testifuppernext\@nnil
-   \edef\dtl@dotestifuppernext{#2}%
- \else
-   \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@tc@rest}%
-   \@dtl@toks{#2}%
-   \edef\dtl@dotestifuppernext{%
-     \noexpand\dtl@testifuppernext\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}%
- \fi
-\fi
-\dtl@dotestifuppernext
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@test@ifalluppercase}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@test@ifuppercase#1#2\end{%
-\def\dtl@tc@rest{#2}%
-\IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeUppercase}{#1#2}{%
-  \@dtl@conditiontrue
-  \def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-  \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\relax
-}{%
- \IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeTextUppercase}{#1#2}{%
-    \@dtl@conditiontrue
-    \def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-    \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\relax
- }{%
-  \edef\dtl@uccode{\the\uccode`#1}%
-  \edef\dtl@code{\number`#1}%
-  \ifnum\dtl@code=\dtl@uccode\relax
-    \@dtl@conditiontrue
-    \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifuppercase
-  \else
-    \ifnum\dtl@uccode=0\relax
-      \@dtl@conditiontrue
-      \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifuppercase
-    \else
-      \@dtl@conditionfalse
-      \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop
-    \fi
-  \fi
-}}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testifcasenoop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@testifcasenoop#1\@nil{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLifAllLowerCase}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLifAllLowerCase}[3]{%
-\protected@edef\dtl@tlc{#1}%
-\expandafter\dtl@testiflowercase\dtl@tlc\@nil\relax
-\if@dtl@condition#2\else#3\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testifalllowercase}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@testiflowercase#1#2{%
-\def\dtl@argi{#1}%
-\def\dtl@argii{#2}%
-\ifx\dtl@argi\@nnil
-  \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\@nnil
-\else
-  \ifx#1\protect
-    \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testiflowercase
-  \else
-    \ifx\lowercase#1\relax
-      \@dtl@conditiontrue
-      \def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-      \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\relax
-    \else
-      \edef\dtl@tc@arg{\string#1}%
-      \expandafter\dtl@test@iflowercase\dtl@tc@arg\end
-      \ifx\dtl@argii\@nnil
-        \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\dtl@testiflowernext\relax
- \edef\dtl@dotestiflowernext{%
-   \noexpand\dtl@testiflowercase}%
-\else
- \ifx\dtl@testiflowernext\@nnil
-   \edef\dtl@dotestiflowernext{#2}%
- \else
-   \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@tc@rest}%
-   \@dtl@toks{#2}%
-   \edef\dtl@dotestiflowernext{%
-     \noexpand\dtl@testiflowernext\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}%
- \fi
-\fi
-\dtl@dotestiflowernext
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@test@ifalllowercase}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@test@iflowercase#1#2\end{%
-\def\dtl@tc@rest{#2}%
-\IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeLowercase}{#1#2}{%
-  \@dtl@conditiontrue
-  \def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-  \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\relax
-}{%
- \IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeTextLowercase}{#1#2}{%
-    \@dtl@conditiontrue
-    \def\dtl@tc@rest{}%
-    \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\relax
- }{%
-  \edef\dtl@lccode{\the\lccode`#1}%
-  \edef\dtl@code{\number`#1}%
-  \ifnum\dtl@code=\dtl@lccode\relax
-    \@dtl@conditiontrue
-    \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testiflowercase
-  \else
-    \ifnum\dtl@lccode=0\relax
-      \@dtl@conditiontrue
-      \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testiflowercase
-    \else
-      \@dtl@conditionfalse
-      \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop
-    \fi
-  \fi
-}}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\subsection{Saving a database to an external file}
-%
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@write}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newwrite\@dtl@write
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsavedb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-% Save a database as an ASCII data file using the separator
-% and delimiter given by \cs{@dtl@separator} and \cs{@dtl@delimiter}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsavedb}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsavedb}[2]{%
-\DTLifdbexists{#1}{%
-\openout\@dtl@write=#2%
-\edef\@dtl@keys{\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}%
-\def\@dtl@header{}%
-\@for\@dtl@key:=\@dtl@keys\do{%
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@header}%
-\ifx\@dtl@header\@empty
- \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@key}{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@header{%
-     \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@key\@dtl@delimiter}%
- }{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@header{\@dtl@key}%
- }%
-\else
- \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@key}{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@header{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator
-     \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@key\@dtl@delimiter}%
- }{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@header{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator
-     \@dtl@key}%
- }%
-\fi
-}%
-\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\@dtl@header}%
-\expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname%
-\@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-\dtl@gathervalues{#1}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-\def\@dtl@outputrow{}%
-\@for\@dtl@key:=\@dtl@keys\do{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@element{\csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@outputrow}%
-\ifx\@dtl@outputrow\@empty
- \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@element}{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{%
-    \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@element\@dtl@delimiter}%
- }{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{\@dtl@element}%
- }%
-\else
- \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@element}{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator
-      \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@element\@dtl@delimiter}%
- }{%
-   \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator
-      \@dtl@element}%
- }%
-\fi
-}%
-\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\@dtl@outputrow}%
-}%
-\closeout\@dtl@write
-}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsavetexdb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-% Save a database as a \LaTeX\ file.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsavetexdb}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsavetexdb}[2]{%
-\DTLifdbexists{#1}{%
-\openout\@dtl@write=#2%
-\edef\@dtl@keys{\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}%
-\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\string\DTLnewdb{#1}}%
-\expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname%
-\@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{%
-\dtl@gathervalues{#1}{\@dtl@currentrow}%
-\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\string\DTLnewrow{#1}}%
-\@for\@dtl@key:=\@dtl@keys\do{%
-\protected@edef\@dtl@element{\csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}%
-\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\string\DTLnewdbentry
- {#1}{\@dtl@key}{\@dtl@element}}%
-}%
-}%
-\closeout\@dtl@write
-}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\subsection{Loading a database from an external file}
-%
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@read}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newread\@dtl@read
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Keep track of current column in data file
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@entrycr}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\dtl@entrycr
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLloaddb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename}
-%\end{definition}
-% Create a new database called \meta{db name}, and load the data in 
-% \meta{filename} into it. The separator and delimiter used in
-% the file must match \cs{@dtl@separator} and \cs{@dtl@delimiter}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLloaddb}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\gdef\DTLloaddb#1#2{%
-\IfFileExists{#2}{%
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\"12\relax
-\openin\@dtl@read=#2%
-\dtl@message{Reading `#2'}%
-\DTLnewdb{#1}%
-\ifeof\@dtl@read
-\else
-  \loop
-    \@dtl@conditionfalse
-    \ifeof\@dtl@read
-    \else
-      \read\@dtl@read to \@dtl@line
-      \dtl@trim\@dtl@line
-      \if\@dtl@line\par
-        \@dtl@conditiontrue
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \if@dtl@condition
-  \repeat
-  \ifeof\@dtl@read
-  \else
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\@dtl@line\@dtl@separator}%
-  \@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax
-  \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{%
-    \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to\@dtl@lin@\@dtl@key
-    \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-    \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@key}%
-    \expandafter
-      \edef\csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\@dtl@tmpcount\endcsname{%
-        \the\@dtl@toks}%
-   }%
-   \ifeof\@dtl@read
-   \else
-     \@dtl@conditiontrue
-     \loop
-      \read\@dtl@read to \@dtl@line
-      \dtl@trim\@dtl@line
-      \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@line}{}}{}%
-      {%
-        \DTLnewrow{#1}%
-        \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@line}%
-        \edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\the\@dtl@toks
-          \@dtl@separator}%
-        \dtl@entrycr=0\relax
-        \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{%
-          \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to
-            \@dtl@lin@\@dtl@thisentry
-          \advance\dtl@entrycr by 1\relax
-          \edef\@dtl@thiskey{%
-            \csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\dtl@entrycr\endcsname}%
-        \DTLnewdbentry{#1}{\@dtl@thiskey}{\@dtl@thisentry}%
-      }%
-      }%
-     \ifeof\@dtl@read \@dtl@conditionfalse\fi
-     \if@dtl@condition
-     \repeat
-   \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\closein\@dtl@read
-\endgroup
-}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Can't load database `#1' (file `#2'
-doesn't exist)}{}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@trim}\marg{line}
-%\end{definition}
-% Trims the trailing space from \meta{line}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@trim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\dtl@trim}[1]{%
-\def\@dtl@trmstr{}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@starttrim#1\@nil%
-\let#1=\@dtl@trmstr
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Start trimming
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@starttrim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@dtl@starttrim#1#2{%
-\ifx\par#1%
- \def\@dtl@dotrim{\@dtl@trim{} #2}%
-\else
- \def\@dtl@dotrim{\@dtl@trim#1#2}%
-\fi
-\@dtl@dotrim%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@trim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@dtl@trim#1 \@nil{\long\def\@dtl@trmstr{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Load a raw database (substitutes "%" $\to$ "\%", 
-% "$" $\to$ "\$", "&" $\to$ "\&", "#" $\to$ "\#",
-% "~" $\to$ "\textasciitilde", "_" $\to$ "\_"
-% and "^" $\to$ "\textasciicircum".)
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLloadrawdb}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\gdef\DTLloadrawdb#1#2{%
-\IfFileExists{#2}{%
-\openin\@dtl@read=#2%
-\dtl@message{Reading `#2'}%
-\DTLnewdb{#1}%
-\ifeof\@dtl@read
-\else
-  \loop
-    \@dtl@conditionfalse
-    \ifeof\@dtl@read
-    \else
-      \@dtl@rawread\@dtl@read to\@dtl@line
-      \dtl@trim\@dtl@line
-      \if\@dtl@line\par
-        \@dtl@conditiontrue
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \if@dtl@condition
-  \repeat
-  \ifeof\@dtl@read
-  \else
-  \dtl@domappings\@dtl@line
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\@dtl@line\@dtl@separator}%
-  \@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax
-  \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{%
-    \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to\@dtl@lin@\@dtl@key
-    \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-    \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@key}%
-    \expandafter
-      \edef\csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\@dtl@tmpcount\endcsname{%
-        \the\@dtl@toks}%
-   }%
-   \ifeof\@dtl@read
-   \else
-     \@dtl@conditiontrue
-     \loop
-      \@dtl@rawread\@dtl@read to\@dtl@line
-      \dtl@trim\@dtl@line
-      \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@line}{}}{}%
-      {%
-        \DTLnewrow{#1}%
-        \dtl@domappings\@dtl@line
-        \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@line}%
-        \edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\the\@dtl@toks
-          \@dtl@separator}%
-        \dtl@entrycr=0\relax
-        \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{%
-          \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to
-            \@dtl@lin@\@dtl@thisentry
-          \advance\dtl@entrycr by 1\relax
-          \edef\@dtl@thiskey{%
-            \csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\dtl@entrycr\endcsname}%
-        \DTLnewdbentry{#1}{\@dtl@thiskey}{\@dtl@thisentry}%
-      }%
-      }%
-     \ifeof\@dtl@read \@dtl@conditionfalse\fi
-     \if@dtl@condition
-     \repeat
-   \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\closein\@dtl@read
-}{%
-\PackageError{datatool}{Can't load database `#1' (file `#2'
-doesn't exist)}{}%
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{@dtl@rawread}\meta{number}to\meta{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Reads in a raw line from file given by \meta{number}
-% converts special characters and stores in \meta{cmd}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@rawread}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\%=\active
-\catcode`$=\active
-\catcode`&=\active
-\catcode`~=\active
-\catcode`_=\active
-\catcode`^=\active
-\catcode`#=\active
-\catcode`?=6\relax
-\catcode`<=1\relax
-\catcode`>=2\relax
-\catcode`\{=\active
-\catcode`\}=\active
-\gdef\@dtl@rawread?1to?2<\relax
-<<\catcode`\%=\active
-\catcode`$=\active
-\catcode`&=\active
-\catcode`~=\active
-\catcode`_=\active
-\catcode`^=\active
-\catcode`#=\active
-\catcode`\{=\active
-\catcode`\}=\active
-\def%<\noexpand\%>\relax
-\def$<\noexpand\$>\relax
-\def&<\&>\relax
-\def#<\#>\relax
-\def~<\noexpand\textasciitilde>\relax
-\def_<\noexpand\_>\relax
-\def^<\noexpand\textasciicircum>\relax
-\@dtl@activatebraces
-\@dtl@doreadraw?1?2>>>
-\gdef\@dtl@doreadraw?1?2<\relax
-\read?1 to \tmp
-\xdef?2<\tmp>\relax
->
-\endgroup
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% \cs{@dtl@activatebraces} resets braces for \cs{@dtl@rawread}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@activatebraces}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\{=\active
-\catcode`\}=\active
-\catcode`<=1\relax
-\catcode`>=2\relax
-\gdef\@dtl@activatebraces<%
- \catcode`\{=\active
- \catcode`\}=\active
- \def{<\noexpand\{>%
- \def}<\noexpand\}>%
->%
-\endgroup
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLrawmap}\marg{string}\marg{replacement}
-%\end{definition}
-% Additional mappings to perform when reading a raw data file
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLrawmap}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLrawmap}[2]{%
-\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@rawmappings}%
-\ifx\@dtl@rawmappings\@empty
-  \def\@dtl@rawmappings{{#1}{#2}}%
-\else
-  \def\@dtl@tmp{{#1}{#2}}
-  \protected@edef\@dtl@rawmappings{\the\@dtl@toks,\@dtl@tmp}
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@rawmappings}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@rawmappings}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{dtl@domappings}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Do all mappings in string given by \meta{cmd}.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@domappings}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@domappings}[1]{%
-\@for\@dtl@map:=\@dtl@rawmappings\do{%
-  \expandafter\DTLsubstitute\expandafter#1\@dtl@map
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsubstitute}\marg{cmd}\marg{original}\marg{replacement}
-%\end{definition}
-% Substitutes first occurence of \meta{original} with
-% \marg{replacement} within the string given by \meta{cmd}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsubstitute}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLsubstitute}[3]{%
-\def\dtl@splitstr##1#2##2\@nil{%
-\def\@dtl@beforepart{##1}%
-\def\@dtl@afterpart{##2}%
-\ifx\@dtl@afterpart\@empty
-  \let\@dtl@replaced=\@empty
-\else
-  \def\@dtl@replaced{#2}%
-  \dtl@split@str##2\@nil
-\fi
-}%
-\def\dtl@split@str##1#2\@nil{%
-\def\@dtl@afterpart{##1}}%
-\expandafter\dtl@splitstr#1#2\@nil
-\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-\else
-  \def#1{}%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@beforepart}%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}%
-  \protected@edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks#3}%
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@afterpart}%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}%
-  \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLsubstituteall}\marg{cmd}\marg{original}\marg{replacement}
-%\end{definition}
-% Substitutes all occurences of \meta{original} with
-% \marg{replacement} within the string given by \meta{cmd}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsubstituteall}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\DTLsubstituteall}[3]{%
-\def\dtl@splitstr##1#2##2\@nil{%
-\def\@dtl@beforepart{##1}\def\@dtl@afterpart{##2}}%
-\let\@dtl@replaced=\@empty
-\IfSubStringInString{#2}{#1}{%
-  \expandafter\dtl@splitstr#1\@nil
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#2}%
-  \edef\@dtl@replaced{\the\toks@}%
-  \def#1{}%
-  \@dtl@conditiontrue
-  \loop
-    \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@beforepart}%
-    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}%
-    \protected@edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks#3}%
-    \IfSubStringInString{#2}{\@dtl@afterpart}{%
-    \expandafter\dtl@splitstr\@dtl@afterpart\@nil
-    }{\@dtl@conditionfalse}%
-  \if@dtl@condition
-  \repeat
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@afterpart}%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}%
-  \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}%
-}{}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\subsection{Currencies}
-% \cs{@dtl@currencies} stores all known currencies. 
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@currencies}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@currencies}{\$,\pounds}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLaddcurrency}\marg{symbol}
-%\end{definition}
-% Adds \meta{symbol} to the list of known currencies
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol}[1]{%
-\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@currencies}%
-\@dtl@toks{#1}%
-\edef\@dtl@currencies{\the\@dtl@toks,\the\toks@}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% If any of the following currency commands have been defined,
-% add them to the list:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-\@ifundefined{texteuro}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\texteuro}}%
-\@ifundefined{textdollar}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textdollar}}%
-\@ifundefined{textstirling}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textstirling}}%
-\@ifundefined{textyen}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textyen}}%
-\@ifundefined{textwon}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textwon}}%
-\@ifundefined{textcurrency}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textcurrency}}%
-\@ifundefined{euro}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\euro}}%
-\@ifundefined{yen}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\yen}}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{@dtl@standardize@currency}\marg{cmd}
-%\end{definition}
-% Substitutes the first currency symbol found in \meta{cmd}
-% with "\$". This is used when testing text to determine
-% if it is currency. The original currency symbol is stored
-% in \cs{@dtl@org@currency}, so that it can be replaced later.
-% If no currency symbol is found, \cs{@dtl@org@currency} will
-% be empty.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@standardize@currency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\@dtl@standardize@currency}[1]{%
-\def\@dtl@org@currency{}%
-\@for\@dtl@thiscurrency:=\@dtl@currencies\do{%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thiscurrency}%
-  \edef\@dtl@dosubs{\noexpand\DTLsubstitute{\noexpand#1}%
-   {\the\toks@}{\noexpand\$}}%
-  \@dtl@dosubs
-  \ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty
-  \else
-    \let\@dtl@org@currency=\@dtl@replaced
-    \@endfortrue
-  \fi
-}%
-\@endforfalse}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{@dtl@currency} is set by \cs{DTLlocaltodecimal} and
-%\cs{@dtl@checknumerical}. It is used by \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}.
-% Set to "\$" by default.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@currency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@dtl@currency}{\$}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLsetdefaultcurrency}\marg{symbol} sets the default currency.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetdefaultcurrency}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsetdefaultcurrency}[1]{%
-\renewcommand*{\@dtl@currency}{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@ifsingle}\marg{arg}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}
-%\end{definition}
-% If there is only one object in \meta{arg} (without expansion)
-% do \meta{true part}, otherwise do false part.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@ifsingle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\dtl@ifsingle}[3]{%
-\@dtl@ifsingle#1\@nil{#2}{#3}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@ifsingle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@ifsingle#1#2\@nil#3#4{%
-\def\dtl@sg@arg{#2}%
-\ifx\dtl@sg@arg\@empty
- #3%
-\else
- #4%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\subsection{Debugging commands}
-% These commands are provided to assist debugging
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtlshowdb}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-% Shows the database.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtlshowdb}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtlshowdb}[1]{%
-\expandafter\show\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtlshowdbkeys}\marg{db name}
-%\end{definition}
-% Shows the key list for the named database.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtlshowdbkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtlshowdbkeys}[1]{%
-\expandafter\show\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtlshowtype}\marg{db name}\marg{key}
-%\end{definition}
-% Show the data type for given key in the named database.
-% This should be an integer from 0 to 3.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtlshowtype}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtlshowtype}[2]{%
-\expandafter\show\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</datatool.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*datapie.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\section{datapie.sty}
-% Declare package:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{datapie}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)]
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Require \sty{xkeyval} package
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define a conditional to determine whether to use colour or
-% grey scale.
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLcolorpiechart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLcolorpiechart
-\DTLcolorpiecharttrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Package options to change the conditional:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{color}{\DTLcolorpiecharttrue}
-\DeclareOption{gray}{\DTLcolorpiechartfalse}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define boolean keys to govern label rotations.
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLrotateinner}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{datapie}[DTL]{rotateinner}[true]{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLrotateouter}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{datapie}[DTL]{rotateouter}[true]{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Set defaults:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLrotateinnerfalse
-\DTLrotateouterfalse
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Package options to change \cs{DTLrotateinner}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{rotateinner}{\DTLrotateinnertrue}
-\DeclareOption{norotateinner}{\DTLrotateinnerfalse}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Package options to change \cs{DTLrotateouter}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{rotateouter}{\DTLrotateoutertrue}
-\DeclareOption{norotateouter}{\DTLrotateouterfalse}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Process options:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptions
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Required packages:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{datatool}
-\RequirePackage{tikz}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define some variables that govern the appearance of the pie
-% chart.
-%
-% The radius of the pie chart:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLradius}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLradius
-\DTLradius=2cm
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Inner label offset ratio
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLinnerratio}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLinnerratio}{0.5}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Outer label offset ratio
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLouterratio}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLouterratio}{1.25}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Cutaway offset ration
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLcutawayratio}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*\DTLcutawayratio{0.2}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The angle of the first segment
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLstartangle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLstartangle}{0}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@inneroffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\dtl@inneroffset
-\dtl@inneroffset=\DTLinnerratio\DTLradius
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@outeroffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\dtl@outeroffset
-\dtl@outeroffset=\DTLouterratio\DTLradius
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@cutawayoffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\dtl@cutawayoffset
-\dtl@cutawayoffset=\DTLcutawayratio\DTLradius
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \cs{dtl@piecutaways} is a comma separated list of segments that
-% need to be cut away from the pie chart.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@piecutaways}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@piecutaways}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% \cs{dtl@innerlabel} specifies the label to appear inside
-% the segment. By default this is the variable used to create
-% the pie chart.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@innerlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@innerlabel{\DTLpievariable}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@outerlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@outerlabel{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% \counterfmt{DTLpieroundvar} is a counter governing the number of digits
-% to round to when using \cs{FPround}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{DTLpieroundvar}
-\setcounter{DTLpieroundvar}{1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayinnerlabel}\marg{label}
-%\end{definition}
-% Command used to format the inner label. This just does the
-% label by default.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayouterlabel}\marg{label}
-%\end{definition}
-% Command used to format the outer label. This just does the
-% label by default.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLpiepercent}
-% returns the percentage value of the current segment.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpiepercent}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLpiepercent}{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
-  \PackageError{datapie}{Can't use 
-  \string\DTLpiepercent\space outside 
-  \string\DTLpiechart}{}%
-\else
-  \csname dtl@piepercent@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \cs{DTLpieatbegintikz} specifies any commands
-% to apply at the start of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. 
-% By default it does nothing, but can be set
-% to any of the \sty{pgf} package's transformation commands, e.g.\ 
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\renewcommand*{\DTLpieatbegintikz}{%
-%\pgftransformcm{2}{0}{0}{1}{\pgforigin}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieatbegintikz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLpieatbegintikz}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \cs{DTLpieatendtikz} specifies any commands
-% to apply at the end of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. 
-% By default it does nothing.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieatendtikz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLpieatendtikz}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color}
-%\end{definition}
-% Assign colour name \meta{color} to the \meta{n}th segment.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}[2]{%
-\expandafter\def\csname dtlpie@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname{#2}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgetpiesegmentcolor}\marg{n}
-%\end{definition}
-% Get the colour specification for segment \meta{n}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgetpiesegmentcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgetpiesegmentcolor}[1]{%
-\csname dtlpie@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdopiesegmentcolor}\marg{n}
-%\end{definition}
-% Set the colour to that for segment \meta{n}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdopiesegmentcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdopiesegmentcolor}[1]{%
-\expandafter\color\expandafter
-{\csname dtlpie@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor}
-% sets the colour to that of the current segment.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor}{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
-  \PackageError{datapie}{Can't use 
-  \string\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor\space outside 
-  \string\DTLpiechart}{}%
-\else
-  \expandafter\DTLdopiesegmentcolor\expandafter{%
-  \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname}%
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLpieoutlinecolor} specifies what colour to draw the
-% outline.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieoutlinecolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLpieoutlinecolor}{black}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLpieoutlinewidth} specifies the line width of the outline:
-% Outline is only drawn if the linewidth is greater than 0pt.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieoutlinewidth}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLpieoutlinewidth
-\DTLpieoutlinewidth=0pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Set the default colours. If there are more than eight segments,
-% more colours will need to be defined.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLcolorpiechart
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{1}{red}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{2}{green}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{3}{blue}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{4}{yellow}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{5}{magenta}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{6}{cyan}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{7}{orange}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{8}{white}
-\else
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{1}{black!15}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{2}{black!25}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{3}{black!35}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{4}{black!45}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{5}{black!55}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{6}{black!65}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{7}{black!75}
- \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{8}{black!85}
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define keys for \cs{DTLpiechart} optional argument.
-% Set the starting angle of the first segment.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{start}{\def\DTLstartangle{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the radius of the pie chart (must be set prior to
-% inneroffset and outeroffset keys.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{radius}{\DTLradius=#1\relax
-\dtl@inneroffset=\DTLinnerratio\DTLradius
-\dtl@outeroffset=\DTLouterratio\DTLradius
-\dtl@cutawayoffset=\DTLcutawayratio\DTLradius}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the inner ratio.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{innerratio}{%
-\def\DTLinnerratio{#1}%
-\dtl@inneroffset=\DTLinnerratio\DTLradius}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the outer ratio
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{outerratio}{%
-\def\DTLouterratio{#1}%
-\dtl@outeroffset=\DTLouterratio\DTLradius}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The cutaway offset ratio
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{cutawayratio}{%
-\def\DTLcutawayratio{#1}%
-\dtl@cutawayoffset=\DTLcutawayratio\DTLradius}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the inner offset as an absolute value (not dependent
-% on the radius.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{inneroffset}{%
-\dtl@inneroffset=#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the outer offset as an absolute value (not dependent
-% on the radius.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{outeroffset}{%
-\dtl@outeroffset=#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the cutaway offset as an absolute value (not dependent
-% on the radius.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{cutawayoffset}{%
-\dtl@cutawayoffset=#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% List of cut away segments.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{cutaway}{%
-\renewcommand*{\dtl@piecutaways}{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Variable used to create the pie chart. (Must be a control
-% sequence.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{variable}{%
-\def\DTLpievariable{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Inner label
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{innerlabel}{%
-\def\dtl@innerlabel{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Outer label
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{datapie}{outerlabel}{%
-\def\dtl@outerlabel{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLpiechart}\oarg{conditions}\marg{option list}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Make a pie chart from data given in data base \meta{db name},
-% where \meta{assign list} is a comma-separated list of
-% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. \meta{option list} must
-% include \texttt{variable}\texttt{=}\meta{cmd}, where \meta{cmd}
-% is included in \meta{assign list}. The optional argument
-% \meta{conditions} is the same as that for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLpiechart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLpiechart}[4][\boolean{true}]{%
-{\let\DTLpievariable=\relax
-\setkeys{datapie}{#2}%
-\ifx\DTLpievariable\relax
-  \PackageError{datapie}{\string\DTLpiechart\space missing variable}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the total.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@total{0}%
-\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-\let\dtl@oldtotal=\dtl@total
-\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-  {\DTLpievariable}{\dtl@variable}%
-\FPadd{\dtl@total}{\dtl@variable}{\dtl@total}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the angles
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-  {\DTLstartangle}{\@dtl@start}%
-\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-  {\DTLpievariable}{\dtl@variable}%
-\dtl@computeangles{%
-\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname}{%
-\dtl@variable}%
-\expandafter\@dtl@seg\expandafter=
-\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname%
-\FPmul{\dtl@tmp}{\dtl@variable}{100}%
-\let\dtl@old=\dtl@tmp
-\FPdiv{\dtl@tmp}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@total}%
-\expandafter\FPround
-\csname dtl@piepercent@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname\dtl@tmp
-\c@DTLpieroundvar
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the offsets for each cut away segment
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@for\dtl@row:=\dtl@piecutaways\do{%
-\expandafter\@dtl@set@off\dtl@row-\relax
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the starting angle
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\dtl@start=\DTLstartangle
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Do the pie chart
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{tikzpicture}
-\DTLpieatbegintikz
-\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store the segment number in \cs{@dtl@seg}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@dtl@seg\expandafter=
-\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the start angle.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\dtl@start{\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the extent
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\dtl@extent{\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the end angle
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\FPadd{\dtl@endangle}{\dtl@start}{\dtl@extent}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the shift.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\dtl@angle{\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}%
-\let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle
-\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@angle
-\ifnum\dtl@angle>180
-  \FPsub{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{360}%
-  \dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@angle
-\fi
-\edef\dtl@cutlen{%
-\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}
-\edef\@dtl@shift{(\dtl@angle:\dtl@cutlen)}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the mid way angle.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\FPmul{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@extent}{0.5}%
-\FPadd{\dtl@midangle}{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@start}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw the segment.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{scope}[shift={\@dtl@shift}]%
-\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@start
-\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@endangle
-\fill[color=\DTLgetpiesegmentcolor\@dtl@seg] (0,0) -- 
-(\dtl@start:\DTLradius)
-arc (\dtl@start:\dtl@endangle:\DTLradius) -- cycle;
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw the outline if required:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifdim\DTLpieoutlinewidth>0pt\relax
-\draw[color=\DTLpieoutlinecolor,line width=\DTLpieoutlinewidth]
-(0,0) -- (\dtl@start:\DTLradius)
-arc (\dtl@start:\dtl@endangle:\DTLradius) -- cycle;
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Convert decimal to an integer
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@midangle
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether to rotate inner labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLrotateinner
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If the mid way angle is between 90 and 270, the text will look
-% upside-down, so adjust accordingly.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle > 90 \and \dtl@midangle < 270\)
-\TE@or \dtl@midangle < -90}{%
-  \FPsub{\dtl@labelangle}{\dtl@midangle}{180}%
-  \dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@labelangle
-  \edef\dtl@innernodeopt{anchor=east,rotate=\dtl@labelangle}%
-}{%
-  \edef\dtl@innernodeopt{anchor=west,rotate=\dtl@midangle}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Don't rotate inner labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\else
-  \edef\dtl@innernodeopt{anchor=center}%
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether to rotate outer labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLrotateouter
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If the mid way angle is between 90 and 270, the text will look
-% upside-down, so adjust accordingly.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle > 90 \and \dtl@midangle < 270\)
-\TE@or \dtl@midangle < -90}{%
-  \FPsub{\dtl@labelangle}{\dtl@midangle}{180}%
-  \dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@labelangle
-  \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=east,rotate=\dtl@labelangle}%
-}{%
-  \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=west,rotate=\dtl@midangle}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Don't rotate outer labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\else
-  \ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle<45\and\dtl@midangle>-45\)
-    \TE@or \dtl@midangle=45
-    \TE@or \dtl@midangle>315}{%
-    % east quadrant
-    \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=west}%
-  }{%
-    \ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle<135\and\dtl@midangle>45\)
-     \TE@or \dtl@midangle=135}{%
-      % north quadrant
-      \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=south}%
-    }{%
-     \ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle<225\and\dtl@midangle>135\)
-      \TE@or \dtl@midangle=225
-      \TE@or \dtl@midangle=-135
-      \TE@or \dtl@midangle<-135}{%
-      % west quadrant
-      \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=east}%
-     }{%
-      \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=north}%
-     }%
-    }
-  }
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw inner and outer labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\@dtl@dolabel{%
-\noexpand\draw (\dtl@midangle:\the\dtl@inneroffset)
-node[\dtl@innernodeopt]{%
-\noexpand\DTLdisplayinnerlabel{\noexpand\dtl@innerlabel}};}%
-\@dtl@dolabel
-\edef\@dtl@dolabel{%
-\noexpand\draw (\dtl@midangle:\the\dtl@outeroffset)
-node[\dtl@outernodeopt]{%
-\noexpand\DTLdisplayouterlabel{\noexpand\dtl@outerlabel}};}%
-\@dtl@dolabel
-\end{scope}
-}%
-\DTLpieatendtikz
-\end{tikzpicture}
-\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@computeangles}\marg{n}\marg{variable}
-%\end{definition}
-% Compute the angles for segment \meta{n}. This sets
-% \cs{dtl@sang@}\meta{n} (start angle),
-% \cs{dtl@angle@}\meta{n} (extent angle),
-% \cs{dtl@cut@angle@}\meta{n} (cut away angle) and
-% \cs{dtl@cut@len@}\meta{n} (cut away length).
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@computeangles}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@computeangles}[2]{%
-\FPifgt{\@dtl@start}{180}%
-% if startangle > 180
-  \let\dtl@old=\@dtl@start
-% startangle = startangle - 360
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@start}{\dtl@old}{360}%
-\fi
-\FPiflt{\@dtl@start}{-180}%
-% if startangle < -180
-  \let\dtl@old=\@dtl@start
-% startangle = startangle + 360
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\dtl@old}{360}%
-\fi
-\expandafter\edef\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{%
-\@dtl@start}%
-\FPmul{\dtl@angle}{360}{#2}%
-\let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle
-\FPdiv{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@total}%
-\expandafter\let\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname=\dtl@angle
-\let\dtl@old=\@dtl@start
-\FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@angle}%
-\expandafter\def\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{0}%
-\expandafter\def\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{0cm}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Set the offset angles.
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@set@off}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@set@off#1-#2\relax{%
-\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{%
-\@@dtl@set@off{#1}}{%
-\@@dtl@set@offr#1-#2\relax}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Set offset for individual segment:
-%\begin{macro}{\@@dtl@set@off}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@@dtl@set@off}[1]{%
-\edef\dtl@old{\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname}%
-\FPmul{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{0.5}%
-\let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle
-\edef\dtl@sang{\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral#1\endcsname}%
-\FPadd{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@sang}%
-\expandafter\edef\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{%
-\dtl@angle}%
-\expandafter\edef\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{%
-  \the\dtl@cutawayoffset}
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Define count register to keep track of segments
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@seg}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@dtl@seg
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Set offset for a range of segments
-%\begin{macro}{\@@dtl@setoffr}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@dtl@set@offr#1-#2-\relax{%
-\ifnum#1>#2\relax
- \PackageError{datapie}{Segment ranges must go in ascending order}{%
-Try #2-#1 instead of #1-#2}%
-\else
- \def\dtl@angle{0}%
- \@dtl@seg=#1\relax
- \whiledo{\not\(\@dtl@seg > #2\)}{%
-  \let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle
-  \edef\dtl@segang{\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}%
-  \FPadd{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@segang}%
-  \advance\@dtl@seg by 1\relax
- }%
- \let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle
- \FPmul{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{0.5}%
- \edef\dtl@sang{\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral#1\endcsname}%
- \let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle
- \FPadd{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@sang}%
- \@dtl@seg=#1\relax
- \whiledo{\not\(\@dtl@seg > #2\)}{%
- \expandafter
-  \let\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname
-  =\dtl@angle
- \expandafter
-  \edef\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname{%
-  \the\dtl@cutawayoffset}
-  \advance\@dtl@seg by 1\relax
- }%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</datapie.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*dataplot.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\section{dataplot.sty}
-% Declare package:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{dataplot}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)]
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Required packages
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
-\RequirePackage{tikz}
-\RequirePackage{datatool}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Load TikZ plot libraries
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\usetikzlibrary{plotmarks}
-\usetikzlibrary{plothandlers}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplotstream}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{x key}\marg{y key}
-%\end{definition}
-% Add points to a stream from the database called \meta{db name}
-% where the $x$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{x key}
-% and the $y$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{y key}.
-% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that
-% for \cs{DTLforeach}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotstream}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotstream}[4][\boolean{true}]{%
-\DTLforeach[#1]{#2}{\dtl@x=#3,\dtl@y=#4}{%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@x}{\dtl@decx}%
-\DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@y}{\dtl@decy}%
-\pgfplotstreampoint{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@decx}{\dtl@decy}}}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLplotmarks} contains a list of plot marks used by
-%\cs{DTLplot}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotmarks}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotmarks}{%
-\pgfuseplotmark{o},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{x},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{+},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{square},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{triangle},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{diamond},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{pentagon},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{asterisk},%
-\pgfuseplotmark{star}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLplotmarkcolors} contains a list of the plot mark colours.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotmarkcolors}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotmarkcolors}{%
-red,%
-green,%
-blue,%
-yellow,%
-magenta,%
-cyan,%
-orange,%
-black,%
-gray}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLplotlines} contains a list of dash patterns used by
-%\cs{DLTplot}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotlines}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotlines}{%
-\pgfsetdash{}{{0pt}},% solid line
-\pgfsetdash{{10pt}{5pt}}{0pt},%
-\pgfsetdash{{5pt}{5pt}}{0pt},%
-\pgfsetdash{{1pt}{5pt}}{0pt},%
-\pgfsetdash{{5pt}{5pt}{1pt}{5pt}}{0pt},%
-\pgfsetdash{{1pt}{3pt}}{0pt},%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLplotlinecolors} contains a list of the plot line colours.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotlinecolors}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotlinecolors}{%
-red,%
-green,%
-blue,%
-yellow,%
-magenta,%
-cyan,%
-orange,%
-black,%
-gray}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The default total plot width is stored in the length 
-% \cs{dtlplotwidth}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotwidth}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLplotwidth
-\setlength\DTLplotwidth{4in}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The default total plot height is stored in the length 
-% \cs{dtlplotheight}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotheight}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLplotheight
-\setlength\DTLplotheight{4in}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The length of the tick marks is given by
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLticklength}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLticklength
-\setlength\DTLticklength{5pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The length of the minor tick marks is given by
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLminorticklength}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLminorticklength
-\setlength\DTLminorticklength{2pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The offset from the axis to the tick label is given by
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLticklabeloffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLticklabeloffset
-\setlength\DTLticklabeloffset{8pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Length to store the height of the $x$ tick labels
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@xticlabelheight}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\dtl@xticlabelheight
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Length to store the width of the $y$ tick labels
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Suggested minimum distance between tick marks where the gap
-% is not specified.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmintickgap}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLmintickgap
-\setlength\DTLmintickgap{20pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Suggested minimum distance between minor tick marks where the gap
-% is not specified.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLminminortickgap}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLminminortickgap
-\setlength\DTLminminortickgap{5pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Round $x$ tick labels to the number of digits given by
-% the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}
-\setcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}{2}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Round $y$ tick labels to the number of digits given by
-% the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{DTLplotroundYvar}
-\setcounter{DTLplotroundYvar}{2}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $x$ axis
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLxaxis}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLxaxis
-\DTLxaxistrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The style of the $x$ axis is just a solid line by default
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLXAxisStyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLXAxisStyle}{-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $y$ axis
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLyaxis}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLyaxis
-\DTLyaxistrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The style of the $y$ axis is just a solid line by default
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLYAxisStyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLYAxisStyle}{-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The style of the major grid lines:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmajorgridstyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmajorgridstyle}{color=gray,-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The style of the minor grid lines:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLminorgridstyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLminorgridstyle}{color=gray,loosely dotted}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Conditional to determine whether the $x$ tics should point in or
-% out.
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLxticsin}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLxticsin
-\DTLxticsintrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Conditional to determine whether the $y$ tics should point in or
-% out.
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLyticsin}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLyticsin
-\DTLyticsintrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Count register to determine the legend setting.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@legendsetting}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\dtl@legendsetting
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Gap between border of plot and legend is given by the
-% lengths \cs{DTLlegendxoffset} and \cs{DTLlegendyoffset}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLlegendxoffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLlegendxoffset
-\setlength\DTLlegendxoffset{10pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLlegendyoffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLlegendyoffset
-\setlength\DTLlegendyoffset{10pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Macro to display the legend:
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLformatlegend}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLformatlegend}[1]{%
-\setlength{\fboxrule}{1.1pt}%
-\fcolorbox{black}{white}{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Conditional to specify whether or not to use markers
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLshowmarkers}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLshowmarkers
-\DTLshowmarkerstrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Conditional to specify whether or not to use lines
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLshowlines}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLshowlines
-\DTLshowlinesfalse
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Hook to insert stuff at the start of the \env{tikzpicture}
-% environment (after the unit vectors have been set).
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotatbegintikz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotatbegintikz}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Hook to insert stuff at the end of the \env{tikzpicture}
-% environment.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotatendtikz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplotatendtikz}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Plot settings. The database key for the $x$ value is
-% given by the "x" setting:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{x}{%
-\def\dtl@xkey{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The database key for the $y$ value is given by the "y" setting:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{y}{%
-\def\dtl@ykey{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The list of plot mark colours is given by the "markcolors" setting. 
-% (This should be a comma separated list of colour names.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{markcolors}{%
-\def\DTLplotmarkcolors{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The list of plot line colours is given by the "linecolors" setting. 
-% (This should be a comma separated list of colour names.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{linecolors}{%
-\def\DTLplotlinecolors{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The list of plot mark and line colours is given by the "colors" 
-% setting.  (This should be a comma separated list of colour names.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{colors}{%
-\def\DTLplotmarkcolors{#1}%
-\def\DTLplotlinecolors{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The list of plot marks is given by the "marks" setting. (This
-% should be a comma separated list of code that generates 
-% pgf plot marks.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{marks}{%
-\def\DTLplotmarks{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The list of plot line styles is given by the "lines" setting. (This
-% should be a comma separated list of code that sets the line
-% style.) An empty set will create solid lines.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{lines}{%
-\def\DTLplotlines{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The total width of the plot is given by the "width" setting.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{width}{%
-\setlength\DTLplotwidth{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The total height of the plot is given by the "height" setting.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{height}{%
-\setlength\DTLplotheight{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether to show lines, markers or both
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{dataplot}{style}[\val\nr]{both,lines,markers}{%
-\ifcase\nr\relax
- \DTLshowlinestrue
- \DTLshowmarkerstrue
-\or
- \DTLshowlinestrue
- \DTLshowmarkersfalse
-\or
- \DTLshowmarkerstrue
- \DTLshowlinesfalse
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether or not to display the axes
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{dataplot}{axes}[\val\nr]{both,x,y,none}[both]{%
-\ifcase\nr\relax
- % both
- \DTLxaxistrue
- \DTLxticstrue
- \DTLyaxistrue
- \DTLyticstrue
-\or % x
- \DTLxaxistrue
- \DTLxticstrue
- \DTLyaxisfalse
- \DTLyticsfalse
-\or % y
- \DTLxaxisfalse
- \DTLxticsfalse
- \DTLyaxistrue
- \DTLyticstrue
-\or % none
- \DTLxaxisfalse
- \DTLxticsfalse
- \DTLyaxisfalse
- \DTLyticsfalse
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Enclose plot in a box
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{box}[true]{}
-\DTLboxfalse
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Condition to determine whether to show the $x$ tick marks
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{xtics}[true]{}
-\DTLxticstrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Condition to determine whether to show the $y$ tick marks
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{ytics}[true]{}
-\DTLyticstrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Condition to determine whether to show the $x$ minor tick marks
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{xminortics}[true]{%
-\ifDTLxminortics \DTLxticstrue\fi}
-\DTLxminorticsfalse
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Condition to determine whether to show the $y$ minor tick marks
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{yminortics}[true]{%
-\ifDTLyminortics \DTLyticstrue\fi}
-\DTLyminorticsfalse
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether to draw the grid
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{grid}[true]{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether the $x$ tick marks should point
-% in or out
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{dataplot}{xticdir}[\val\nr]{in,out}{%
-\ifcase\nr\relax
- \DTLxticsintrue
-\or
- \DTLxticsinfalse
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether the $y$ tick marks should point
-% in or out
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{dataplot}{yticdir}[\val\nr]{in,out}{%
-\ifcase\nr\relax
- \DTLyticsintrue
-\or
- \DTLyticsinfalse
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether the $x$ and $y$ tick marks should point
-% in or out
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{dataplot}{ticdir}[\val\nr]{in,out}{%
-\ifcase\nr\relax
- \DTLxticsintrue
- \DTLyticsintrue
-\or
- \DTLxticsinfalse
- \DTLyticsinfalse
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the bounds of the graph (value must be in the form
-% \meta{min x}","\meta{min y}","\meta{max x}","\meta{max y}
-% (bounds overrides minx, miny, maxx and maxy settings.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{bounds}{%
-\def\dtl@bounds{#1}}
-\let\dtl@bounds=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set only the lower $x$ bound
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{minx}{%
-\def\dtl@minx{#1}}
-\let\dtl@minx=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set only the upper $x$ bound:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{maxx}{%
-\def\dtl@maxx{#1}}
-\let\dtl@maxx=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set only the lower $y$ bound:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{miny}{%
-\def\dtl@miny{#1}}
-\let\dtl@miny=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set only the upper $y$ bound:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{maxy}{%
-\def\dtl@maxy{#1}}
-\let\dtl@maxy=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define list of points for $x$ ticks. (Must be a comma separated
-% list of decimal numbers.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{xticpoints}{%
-\def\dtl@xticlist{#1}\DTLxticstrue\DTLxaxistrue}
-\let\dtl@xticlist=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define list of points for $y$ ticks. (Must be a comma separated
-% list of decimal numbers.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{yticpoints}{%
-\def\dtl@yticlist{#1}\DTLyticstrue\DTLyaxistrue}
-\let\dtl@yticlist=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define a the gap between $x$ tick marks (xticpoints overrides
-% xticgap)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{xticgap}{\def\dtl@xticgap{#1}%
-\DTLxticstrue\DTLxaxistrue}
-\let\dtl@xticgap=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define a the gap between $y$ tick marks (yticpoints overrides
-% yticgap)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{yticgap}{\def\dtl@yticgap{#1}%
-\DTLyticstrue\DTLyaxistrue}
-\let\dtl@yticgap=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define comma separated list of labels for $x$ ticks.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{xticlabels}{%
-\def\dtl@xticlabels{#1}\DTLxticstrue\DTLxaxistrue}
-\let\dtl@xticlabels=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define comma separated list of labels for $y$ ticks.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{yticlabels}{%
-\def\dtl@yticlabels{#1}\DTLyticstrue\DTLyaxistrue}
-\let\dtl@yticlabels=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define $x$ axis label
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{xlabel}{%
-\def\dtl@xlabel{#1}}
-\let\dtl@xlabel=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define $y$ axis label
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{ylabel}{%
-\def\dtl@ylabel{#1}}
-\let\dtl@ylabel=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The legend setting may be one of: "none" (don't show it),
-% "north", "northeast", "east", "southeast", "south", "southwest",
-% "west", or "northwest". These set the count register 
-% \cs{dtl@legendsetting}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{dataplot}{legend}[\val\nr]{none,north,northeast,%
-east,southeast,south,southwest,west,northwest}[northeast]{%
-\dtl@legendsetting=\nr\relax
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Legend labels (comma separated list). If omitted, the database
-% name is used.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{dataplot}{legendlabels}{\def\dtl@legendlabels{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Temporary length:
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@tmplength}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\dtl@tmplength
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLplot}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{settings}
-%\end{definition}
-% Creates a plot (inside a \env{tikzpicture} environment) of all
-% the data given in the databases listed in \meta{db list}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLplot}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLplot}[3][\boolean{true}]{{%
-\let\dtl@xkey=\relax
-\let\dtl@ykey=\relax
-\let\dtl@legendlabels=\relax
-\setkeys{dataplot}{#3}%
-\let\dtl@plotmarklist=\DTLplotmarks
-\let\dtl@plotlinelist=\DTLplotlines
-\let\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist=\DTLplotmarkcolors
-\let\dtl@plotlinecolorlist=\DTLplotlinecolors
-\def\dtl@legend{}%
-\ifx\dtl@legendlabels\relax
- \edef\dtl@legendlabels{#2}%
-\fi
-\ifx\dtl@xkey\relax
-  \PackageError{dataplot}{Missing x setting for 
-    \string\DTLplot}{}%
-\else
-  \ifx\dtl@ykey\relax
-    \PackageError{dataplot}{Missing y setting for 
-      \string\DTLplot}{}%
-  \else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If user didn't specified bounds, 
-% compute the maximum and minimum $x$ and $y$ values over 
-% all the databases listed.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-    \ifx\dtl@bounds\relax
-      \DTLcomputebounds[#1]{#2}{\dtl@xkey}{\dtl@ykey}
-        {\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLmaxY}%
-      \ifx\dtl@minx\relax
-      \else
-         \let\DTLminX=\dtl@minx
-      \fi
-      \ifx\dtl@maxx\relax
-      \else
-         \let\DTLmaxX=\dtl@maxx
-      \fi
-      \ifx\dtl@miny\relax
-      \else
-         \let\DTLminY=\dtl@miny
-      \fi
-      \ifx\dtl@maxy\relax
-      \else
-         \let\DTLmaxY=\dtl@maxy
-      \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Otherwise extract information from \cs{dtl@bounds}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-    \else
-      \expandafter\dtl@getbounds\dtl@bounds\@nil
-    \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine scaling factors.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-    \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLplotwidth
-    \FPsub{\dtl@dx}{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLminX}%
-    \FPdiv{\dtl@unit@x}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@dx}%
-    \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLplotheight
-    \FPsub{\dtl@dy}{\DTLmaxY}{\DTLminY}%
-    \FPdiv{\dtl@unit@y}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@dy}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If x tics specified, construct a list of x tic points if not
-% already specified.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \ifDTLxtics
-     \ifx\dtl@xticlist\relax
-       \ifx\dtl@xticgap\relax
-         \dtl@constructticklist\DTLminX\DTLmaxX
-           \dtl@unit@x\dtl@xticlist
-       \else
-         \DTLifFPopenbetween{0}{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxX}{%
-           \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz
-             \DTLminX\DTLmaxX\dtl@xticlist\dtl@xticgap}{%
-           \dtl@constructticklistwithgap
-             \DTLminX\DTLmaxX\dtl@xticlist\dtl@xticgap}%
-       \fi
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Construct a list of $x$ minor tick points if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \let\dtl@xminorticlist\@empty
-     \ifDTLxminortics
-       \let\dtl@prevtick=\relax
-       \@for\dtl@nexttick:=\dtl@xticlist\do{%
-         \ifx\dtl@prevtick\relax
-         \else
-           \dtl@constructminorticklist
-              \dtl@prevtick\dtl@nexttick\dtl@unit@x\dtl@xminorticlist
-         \fi
-         \let\dtl@prevtick=\dtl@nexttick
-       }%
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine the height of the $x$ tick labels.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifx\dtl@xticlabels\relax
-       \settoheight{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\dtl@xticlist}%
-     \else
-       \settoheight{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\dtl@xticlabels}%
-      \fi
-   \else
-     \setlength{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{0pt}%
-   \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If y tics specified, construct a list of y tic points if not
-% already specified.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{0pt}%
-   \ifDTLytics
-     \ifx\dtl@yticlist\relax
-       \ifx\dtl@yticgap\relax
-       \dtl@constructticklist\DTLminY\DTLmaxY
-         \dtl@unit@y\dtl@yticlist
-       \else
-         \DTLifFPopenbetween{0}{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxY}{%
-           \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz
-             \DTLminY\DTLmaxY\dtl@yticlist\dtl@yticgap}{%
-           \dtl@constructticklistwithgap
-             \DTLminY\DTLmaxY\dtl@yticlist\dtl@yticgap}%
-       \fi
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Construct a list of $y$ minor tick points if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \let\dtl@yminorticlist\@empty
-     \ifDTLyminortics
-       \let\dtl@prevtick=\relax
-       \@for\dtl@nexttick:=\dtl@yticlist\do{%
-         \ifx\dtl@prevtick\relax
-         \else
-           \dtl@constructminorticklist
-              \dtl@prevtick\dtl@nexttick\dtl@unit@y\dtl@yminorticlist
-         \fi
-         \let\dtl@prevtick=\dtl@nexttick
-       }%
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine the width of the $y$ tick labels.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifx\dtl@ylabel\relax
-     \else
-       \ifx\dtl@yticlabels\relax
-         \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtl@yticlist\do{%
-           \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thislabel}
-                   {\c@DTLplotroundYvar}%
-           \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{\dtl@thislabel}%
-           \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-             \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-           \fi
-         }%
-       \else
-         \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtl@yticlabels\do{%
-           \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{\dtl@thislabel}%
-           \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-             \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-           \fi
-         }%
-       \fi
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Start the picture.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \begin{tikzpicture}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the $x$ and $y$ unit vectors.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\dtl@unit@x sp}{0pt}}%
-     \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\dtl@unit@y sp}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Add any extra information the user requires
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \DTLplotatbegintikz
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine whether to put a box around the plot
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifDTLbox
-       \draw (\DTLminX,\DTLminY) -- (\DTLmaxX,\DTLminY) --
-             (\DTLmaxX,\DTLmaxY) -- (\DTLminX,\DTLmaxY) --
-             cycle;
-     \else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $x$ axis if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifDTLxaxis
-          \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLXAxisStyle]
-            (\DTLminX,\DTLminY) -- (\DTLmaxX,\DTLminY);
-        \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $y$ axis if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifDTLyaxis
-          \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLYAxisStyle]
-            (\DTLminX,\DTLminY) -- (\DTLminX,\DTLmaxY);
-        \fi
-      \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot grid if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifDTLgrid
-        \ifDTLxminortics
-          \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xminorticlist\do{%
-            \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLminorgridstyle]
-             (\dtl@thistick,\DTLminY) -- (\dtl@thistick,\DTLmaxY);
-          }%
-        \fi
-        \ifDTLyminortics
-          \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yminorticlist\do{%
-            \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLminorgridstyle]
-             (\DTLminX,\dtl@thistick) -- (\DTLmaxX,\dtl@thistick);
-          }%
-        \fi
-        \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xticlist\do{%
-          \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLmajorgridstyle]
-             (\dtl@thistick,\DTLminY) -- (\dtl@thistick,\DTLmaxY);
-        }%
-        \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yticlist\do{%
-          \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLmajorgridstyle]
-             (\DTLminX,\dtl@thistick) -- (\DTLmaxX,\dtl@thistick);
-        }%
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $x$ tics if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-      \ifDTLxtics
-        \addtolength\dtl@xticlabelheight{\DTLticklabeloffset}%
-        \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xticlist\do{%
-          \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-          \ifDTLxticsin
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-                \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-                            {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLticklength}}}
-          \else
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-              \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-                          {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}}
-          \fi
-          \ifDTLbox
-            \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}}
-            \ifDTLxticsin
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                  \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                              {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}}
-            \else
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                            {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLticklength}}}
-            \fi
-          \fi
-          \pgfusepath{stroke}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot the tick labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-          \ifx\dtl@xticlabels\relax
-             \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick}
-                     {\c@DTLplotroundXvar}%
-          \else
-             \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@xticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest
-             \let\dtl@xticlabels=\dtl@rest
-          \fi
-          \pgftext[base,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-                      {\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-                      {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\dtl@xticlabelheight}}}]
-                  {\dtl@thislabel}
-        }%
-      \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $x$ label if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifx\dtl@xlabel\relax
-     \else
-       \addtolength{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\baselineskip}%
-       \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLplotwidth}
-       \pgftext[base,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-           {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}%
-           {\pgfpoint{\dtl@tmplength}{-\dtl@xticlabelheight}}}]{%
-          \dtl@xlabel}
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot the $x$ minor ticks if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifDTLxminortics
-        \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xminorticlist\do{%
-          \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-          \ifDTLxticsin
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-                \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-                            {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLminorticklength}}}
-          \else
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-              \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}}
-                          {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLminorticklength}}}
-          \fi
-          \ifDTLbox
-            \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}}
-            \ifDTLxticsin
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                  \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                              {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLminorticklength}}}
-            \else
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                            {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLminorticklength}}}
-            \fi
-          \fi
-        }%
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $y$ tics if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-      \ifDTLytics
-        \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yticlist\do{%
-          \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-          \ifDTLyticsin
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-                \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                            {\pgfpoint{\DTLticklength}{0pt}}}
-          \else
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-              \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                          {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}}
-          \fi
-          \ifDTLbox
-            \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-            \ifDTLyticsin
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                  \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                              {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}}
-            \else
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                  \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                              {\pgfpoint{\DTLticklength}{0pt}}}
-            \fi
-          \fi
-          \pgfusepath{stroke}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot the $y$ tick labels if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-          \ifx\dtl@yticlabels\relax
-             \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick}
-                     {\c@DTLplotroundYvar}%
-          \else
-             \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@yticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest
-             \let\dtl@yticlabels=\dtl@rest
-          \fi
-          \pgftext[right,at={\pgfpointadd
-                      {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                      {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklabeloffset}{0pt}}}]
-            {\dtl@thislabel}
-        }%
-      \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $y$ label if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifx\dtl@ylabel\relax
-     \else
-       \addtolength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\baselineskip}%
-       \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLplotheight}
-       \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-           {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}%
-           {\pgfpoint{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}}},
-           rotate=90]{%
-          \dtl@ylabel}
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot the $y$ minor ticks if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-     \ifDTLyminortics
-        \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yminorticlist\do{%
-          \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-          \ifDTLyticsin
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-                \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                            {\pgfpoint{\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}}
-          \else
-            \pgfpathlineto{
-              \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                          {\pgfpoint{-\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}}
-          \fi
-          \ifDTLbox
-            \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-            \ifDTLyticsin
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                  \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                              {\pgfpoint{-\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}}
-            \else
-              \pgfpathlineto{
-                  \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                              {\pgfpoint{\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}}
-            \fi
-          \fi
-          \pgfusepath{stroke}
-        }%
-     \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through each database
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-      \@for\dtl@thisdb:=#2\do{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Get the current plot mark colour.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifx\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist\@empty
-          \let\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist=\DTLplotmarkcolors
-        \fi
-        \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist\dtl@thisplotmarkcolor
-           \dtl@remainder
-        \let\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist=\dtl@remainder
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Get the current plot mark, and store in \cs{dtl@mark}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifDTLshowmarkers
-          \ifx\dtl@plotmarklist\@empty
-             \let\dtl@plotmarklist=\DTLplotmarks
-          \fi
-          \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotmarklist\dtl@thisplotmark
-             \dtl@remainder
-          \let\dtl@plotmarklist=\dtl@remainder
-          \ifx\dtl@thisplotmark\relax
-            \let\dtl@mark=\relax
-          \else
-            \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@thisplotmark}%
-            \ifx\dtl@thisplotmarkcolor\@empty
-              \edef\dtl@mark{\the\toks@}%
-            \else
-              \edef\dtl@mark{%
-                  \noexpand\color{\dtl@thisplotmarkcolor}%
-                \the\toks@}%
-            \fi
-          \fi
-        \else
-          \let\dtl@mark=\relax
-        \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Get the current plot line colour.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifx\dtl@plotlinecolorlist\@empty
-          \let\dtl@plotlinecolorlist=\DTLplotlinecolors
-        \fi
-        \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotlinecolorlist\dtl@thisplotlinecolor
-           \dtl@remainder
-        \let\dtl@plotlinecolorlist=\dtl@remainder
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Get the current line style, and store in \cs{dtl@linestyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifDTLshowlines
-          \ifx\dtl@plotlinelist\@empty
-             \let\dtl@plotlinelist=\DTLplotlines
-          \fi
-          \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotlinelist\dtl@thisplotline
-             \dtl@remainder
-          \let\dtl@plotlinelist=\dtl@remainder
-          \expandafter\ifx\dtl@thisplotline\relax
-            \let\dtl@linestyle=\relax
-          \else
-            \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@thisplotline}%
-            \ifx\dtl@thisplotlinecolor\@empty
-              \edef\dtl@linestyle{\the\toks@}%
-            \else
-              \edef\dtl@linestyle{%
-                  \noexpand\color{\dtl@thisplotlinecolor}%
-                \the\toks@}%
-            \fi
-          \fi
-        \else
-          \let\dtl@linestyle=\relax
-        \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Append this plot setting to the legend.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifnum\dtl@legendsetting>0\relax
-          \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@legendlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest
-          \let\dtl@legendlabels=\dtl@rest
-          \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@mark}%
-          \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@linestyle}%
-          \edef\dtl@addtolegend{\noexpand\DTLaddtoplotlegend
-            {\the\toks@}{\the\@dtl@toks}{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-          \dtl@addtolegend
-        \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store stream in \cs{dtl@stream}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \def\dtl@stream{\pgfplotstreamstart}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Only plot points that lie inside bounds.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \DTLforeach[#1]{\dtl@thisdb}{\dtl@x=\dtl@xkey,%
-            \dtl@y=\dtl@ykey}{%
-          \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@x}{\dtl@decx}%
-          \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@y}{\dtl@decy}%
-          \ifthenelse{%
-            \DTLisclosedbetween{\dtl@x}{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxX}%
-            \and
-            \DTLisclosedbetween{\dtl@y}{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxY}%
-            }{%
-            \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@stream}%
-            \edef\dtl@stream{\the\toks@
-              \noexpand\pgfplotstreampoint
-               {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@decx}{\dtl@decy}}}%
-          }{}%
-        }%
-        \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@stream}%
-        \edef\dtl@stream{\the\toks@\noexpand\pgfplotstreamend}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% End plot stream and draw path.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-        \ifx\dtl@linestyle\relax
-        \else
-          \begin{scope}
-          \dtl@linestyle
-          \pgfplothandlerlineto
-          \dtl@stream
-          \pgfusepath{stroke}
-          \end{scope}
-        \fi
-        \ifx\dtl@mark\relax
-        \else
-          \begin{scope}
-          \pgfplothandlermark{\dtl@mark}%
-          \dtl@stream
-          \pgfusepath{stroke}
-          \end{scope}
-        \fi
-      }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot legend if required.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-      \ifcase\dtl@legendsetting
-      % none
-      \or % north
-        \pgftext[top,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{0.5\DTLplotwidth}{-\DTLlegendyoffset}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                  {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % north east
-        \pgftext[top,right,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{-\DTLlegendxoffset}{-\DTLlegendyoffset}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                  {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % east
-        \pgftext[center,right,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLminY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{-\DTLlegendxoffset}{0.5\DTLplotheight}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                  {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % south east
-        \pgftext[bottom,right,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLminY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{-\DTLlegendxoffset}{\DTLlegendyoffset}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                   {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % south
-        \pgftext[center,bottom,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{0.5\DTLplotwidth}{\DTLlegendyoffset}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                   {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % south west
-        \pgftext[bottom,left,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{\DTLlegendxoffset}{\DTLlegendyoffset}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                   {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % west
-        \pgftext[center,left,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{\DTLlegendxoffset}{0.5\DTLplotheight}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                   {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \or % north west
-        \pgftext[top,left,at={\pgfpointadd
-                 {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxY}}
-                 {\pgfpoint{\DTLlegendxoffset}{-\DTLlegendyoffset}}}]
-                {\DTLformatlegend
-                   {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}}
-      \fi
-      \DTLplotatendtikz
-      \end{tikzpicture}
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Extract bounds:
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@getbounds}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dtl@getbounds#1,#2,#3,#4\@nil{%
-\def\DTLminX{#1}%
-\def\DTLminY{#2}%
-\def\DTLmaxX{#3}%
-\def\DTLmaxY{#4}%
-\FPifgt{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxX}
- \PackageError{dataplot}{Min X > Max X in bounds #1,#2,#3,#4}{%
- The bounds must be specified as minX,minY,maxX,maxY}%
-\fi
-\FPifgt{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxY}
- \PackageError{dataplot}{Min Y > Max Y in bounds #1,#2,#3,#4}{%
- The bounds must be specified as minX,minY,maxX,maxY}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@constructticklist}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{scale factor}\marg{list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max}
-% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence.)
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklist}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklist}[4]{%
-\DTLifFPopenbetween{0}{#1}{#2}{%
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@width}{0}{#1}%
-  \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{\@dtl@width}{#3}%
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@width}{10}%
-  \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@neggap sp}%
-  \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-    \FPdiv{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@width}{4}%
-    \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@neggap sp}%
-    \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-      \FPdiv{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@width}{2}%
-      \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@neggap sp}%
-      \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-        \let\@dtl@neggap=\@dtl@width
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{#2}{#3}%
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@posgap}{\@dtl@width}{10}%
-  \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@posgap sp}%
-  \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-    \FPdiv{\@dtl@posgap}{\@dtl@width}{4}%
-    \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@posgap sp}%
-    \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-      \FPdiv{\@dtl@posgap}{\@dtl@width}{2}%
-      \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@posgap sp}%
-      \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-        \let\@dtl@posgap=\@dtl@width
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \FPmax{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@posgap}%
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@gap}{#3}%
-  \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz{#1}{#2}{#4}{\@dtl@gap}%
-}{%
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@width}{#2}{#1}%
-  \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{\@dtl@width}{#3}%
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{10}%
-  \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}%
-  \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-    \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{4}%
-    \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}%
-    \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-      \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{2}%
-      \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}%
-      \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap
-        \let\@dtl@gap=\@dtl@width
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@gap}{#3}%
-  \dtl@constructticklistwithgap{#1}{#2}{#4}{\@dtl@gap}%
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@constructticklistwithgap}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{list}\marg{gap}
-%\end{definition}
-% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max}
-% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence) using the gap given
-% by \meta{gap} where the gap is given in user co-ordinates.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklistwithgap}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklistwithgap}[4]{%
-\edef\@dtl@thistick{#1}%
-\edef#3{#1}%
-\FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-\whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{#1}{#2}}{%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}%
-  \edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-}%
-\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#2}%
-\edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@constructticklistwithgapz}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{list}\marg{gap}
-%\end{definition}
-% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max}
-% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence) using the gap given
-% by \meta{gap} where the tick list straddles zero.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapz}[4]{%
-\edef\@dtl@thistick{0}%
-\edef#3{0}%
-\FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-\whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{0}{#2}}{%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}%
-  \edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}%
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-}%
-\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#2}%
-\edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}%
-\FPifeq{#1}{0}%
-\else
-\edef\@dtl@thistick{0}%
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-  \whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{#1}{0}}{%
-    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}%
-    \edef#3{\the\toks@,#3}%
-    \FPsub{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-  }%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}%
-  \edef#3{\the\toks@,#3}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@constructminorticklist}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{scale factor}\marg{list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Construct a list of minor tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max}
-% and append to \meta{list} (a control sequence.)
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructminorticklist}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@constructminorticklist}[4]{%
-  \FPsub{\@dtl@width}{#2}{#1}%
-  \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{\@dtl@width}{#3}%
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{10}%
-  \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}%
-  \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLminminortickgap
-    \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{4}%
-    \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}%
-    \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLminminortickgap
-      \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{2}%
-      \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}%
-      \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLminminortickgap
-        \let\@dtl@gap=\@dtl@width
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@gap}{#3}%
-  \dtl@constructticklistwithgapex{#1}{#2}{\dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@gap}%
-  \ifx#4\@empty
-    \let#4=\dtl@tmp
-  \else
-    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#4}%
-    \edef#4{#4,\dtl@tmp}%
-  \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{dtl@constructticklistwithgapex}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{list}\marg{gap}
-%\end{definition}
-% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max}
-% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence) using the gap given
-% by \meta{gap} where the gap is given in user co-ordinates.
-% The end points are excluded from the list.
-%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapex}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapex}[4]{%
-\edef\@dtl@thistick{#1}%
-\let#3=\@empty
-\FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-\whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{#1}{#2}}{%
-  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}%
-  \ifx#3\@empty
-    \edef#3{\the\toks@}%
-  \else
-    \edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}%
-  \fi
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}%
-}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLaddtoplotlegend}\marg{marker}\marg{line style}\marg{label}
-%\end{definition}
-% Add entry to legend.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLaddtoplotlegend}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLaddtoplotlegend}[3]{%
-\def\dtl@legendline{}%
-\ifx\relax#2\relax
-\else
-  \toks@{#2%
-  \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-10pt}{0pt}}%
-  \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{10pt}{0pt}}%
-  \pgfusepath{stroke}}%
-  \edef\dtl@legendline{\the\toks@}%
-\fi
-\ifx\relax#1\relax
-\else
-  \toks@{#1}% 
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@legendline}%
-  \edef\dtl@legendline{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@}%
-\fi
-\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@legendline}%
-\ifx\dtl@legend\@empty
-  \edef\dtl@legend{\noexpand\tikz\the\toks@; \noexpand& #3}%
-\else
-  \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@legend}%
-  \edef\dtl@legend{\the\@dtl@toks\noexpand\\%
-    \noexpand\tikz\the\toks@; \noexpand& #3}%
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</dataplot.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*databar.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\section{databar.sty}
-% Declare package:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{databar}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)]
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Require \sty{xkeyval} package
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Require \sty{dataplot} package
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{dataplot}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define a conditional to determine whether to use colour or
-% grey scale.
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLcolorbarchart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLcolorbarchart
-\DTLcolorbarcharttrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Package options to change the conditional:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{color}{\DTLcolorbarcharttrue}
-\DeclareOption{gray}{\DTLcolorbarchartfalse}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\cs{DTLbarXlabelalign} specifies the alignment
-% for the $x$ axis labels.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbarXlabelalign}{left,rotate=-90}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\cs{DTLbarYticklabelalign} specifies the alignment
-% for the $x$ axis labels.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}{right}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define boolean keys to govern bar chart orientation.
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLverticalbars}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@boolkey{databar}[DTL]{verticalbars}[true]{%
-\ifDTLverticalbars
- \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{left,rotate=-90}%
- \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{right}
-\else
- \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{right}%
- \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{center}
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Set defaults:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLverticalbarstrue
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Package options to change \cs{ifDTLverticalbars}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{vertical}{\DTLverticalbarstrue
- \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{left,rotate=-90}%
- \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{right}
-}
-\DeclareOption{horizontal}{\DTLverticalbarsfalse
- \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{right}%
- \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{center}
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Process options:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptions
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Required packages:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{datatool}
-\RequirePackage{tikz}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define some variables that govern the appearance of the bar
-% chart.
-%
-% The total height of the bar chart
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarchartlength}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLbarchartlength
-\DTLbarchartlength=3in
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The width of each bar 
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarwidth}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLbarwidth
-\DTLbarwidth=1cm
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% The offset from the $x$ axis to the bar label
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarlabeloffset}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLbarlabeloffset
-\setlength\DTLbarlabeloffset{10pt}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The style of the $x$ axis
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLBarXAxisStyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLBarXAxisStyle}{-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% The style of the $y$ axis
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLBarYAxisStyle}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLBarYAxisStyle}{-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \counterfmt{DTLbarroundvar} is a counter governing the number of digits
-% to round to when using \cs{FPround}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{DTLbarroundvar}
-\setcounter{DTLbarroundvar}{1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\cs{DTLbardisplayYticklabel} governs how the $y$ tick labels appear.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel} governs how the lower bar labels appear.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel} governs how the lower multi bar labels appear.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayupperbarlabel} governs how the upper bar labels 
-% appear.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayupperbarlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayupperbarlabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\cs{DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel} governs how the upper multi bar 
-% labels appear.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel}[1]{#1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \cs{DTLbaratbegintikz} specifies any commands
-% to apply at the start of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. 
-% By default it does nothing.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaratbegintikz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbaratbegintikz}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \cs{DTLbaratendtikz} specifies any commands
-% to apply at the end of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. 
-% By default it does nothing.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaratendtikz}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbaratendtikz}{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $x$
-% axis
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLbarxaxis}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLbarxaxis
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $y$
-% axis
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLbaryaxis}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLbaryaxis
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $y$
-% tick marks
-%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLbarytics}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTLbarytics
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Define count register to store the current bar index:
-%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@barcount}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@dtl@barcount
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLsetbarcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color}
-%\end{definition}
-% Assign colour name \meta{color} to the \meta{n}th bar.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetbarcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLsetbarcolor}[2]{%
-\expandafter\def\csname dtlbar@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname{#2}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLgetbarcolor}\marg{n}
-%\end{definition}
-% Get the colour specification for the \meta{n}th bar
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLgetbarcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLgetbarcolor}[1]{%
-\csname dtlbar@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-%\cs{DTLdobarcolor}\marg{n}
-%\end{definition}
-% Set the colour to that for the \meta{n}th bar
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdobarcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdobarcolor}[1]{%
-\expandafter\color\expandafter
-{\csname dtlbar@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLdocurrentbarcolor}
-% sets the colour to that of the current bar.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLdocurrentbarcolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLdocurrentbarcolor}{%
-\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax
-  \PackageError{databar}{Can't use 
-  \string\DTLdocurrentbarcolor\space outside 
-  \string\DTLbarchart}{}%
-\else
-  \expandafter\DTLdobarcolor\expandafter{%
-  \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname}%
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLbaroutlinecolor} specifies what colour to draw the
-% outline.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaroutlinecolor}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbaroutlinecolor}{black}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\cs{DTLbaroutlinewidth} specifies the line width of the outline:
-% Outline is only drawn if the linewidth is greater than 0pt.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\DTLbaroutlinewidth
-\DTLbaroutlinewidth=0pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% Set the default colours. If there are more than eight bars,
-% more colours will need to be defined.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLcolorbarchart
- \DTLsetbarcolor{1}{red}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{2}{green}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{3}{blue}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{4}{yellow}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{5}{magenta}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{6}{cyan}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{7}{orange}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{8}{white}
-\else
- \DTLsetbarcolor{1}{black!15}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{2}{black!25}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{3}{black!35}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{4}{black!45}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{5}{black!55}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{6}{black!65}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{7}{black!75}
- \DTLsetbarcolor{8}{black!85}
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Define keys for \cs{DTLbarchart} optional argument.
-% Set the maximum value of the $y$ axis.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{max}{\def\DTLbarmax{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the total length of the bar chart
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{length}{\DTLbarchartlength=#1\relax
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the maximum depth (negative extent)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{maxdepth}{%
-\ifnum#1>0\relax
- \PackageError{databar}{depth must be zero or negative}{}%
-\else
- \def\DTLnegextent{#1}%
-\fi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine which axes should be shown
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@choicekey{databar}{axes}[\var\nr]{both,x,y,none}{%
-\ifcase\nr\relax
- % both
-  \DTLbarxaxistrue
-  \DTLbaryaxistrue
-  \DTLbaryticstrue
-\or
- % x only
-  \DTLbarxaxistrue
-  \DTLbaryaxisfalse
-  \DTLbaryticsfalse
-\or
- % y only
-  \DTLbarxaxisfalse
-  \DTLbaryaxistrue
-  \DTLbaryticstrue
-\or
- % neither
-  \DTLbarxaxisfalse
-  \DTLbaryaxisfalse
-  \DTLbaryticsfalse
-\fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Variable used to create the bar chart. (Must be a control
-% sequence.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{variable}{%
-\def\DTLbarvariable{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Variables used to create the multi bar chart. (Must be a
-% comma separated list of control sequences.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{variables}{%
-\def\dtlbar@variables{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Bar width
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{barwidth}{\setlength{\DTLbarwidth}{#1}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Lower bar labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{barlabel}{%
-\def\dtl@barlabel{#1}}
-\def\dtl@barlabel{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Lower bar labels for multi-bar charts
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{multibarlabels}{%
-\def\dtl@multibarlabels{#1}}
-\def\dtl@multibarlabels{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Gap between groups in multi-bar charts (This should be in $x$ units
-% where 1 $x$ unit is the width of a bar.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{groupgap}{\def\dtlbar@groupgap{#1}}
-\def\dtlbar@groupgap{1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Upper bar labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{upperbarlabel}{%
-\def\dtl@upperbarlabel{#1}}
-\def\dtl@upperbarlabel{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Upper bar labels for multi-bar charts
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{uppermultibarlabels}{%
-\def\dtl@uppermultibarlabels{#1}}
-\def\dtl@uppermultibarlabels{}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define list of points for $y$ tics. (Must be a comma separated list
-% of decimal numbers.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{yticpoints}{%
-\def\dtlbar@yticlist{#1}\DTLbaryticstrue\DTLbaryaxistrue}
-\let\dtlbar@yticlist=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the $y$ tick gap:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{yticgap}{%
-\def\dtlbar@yticgap{#1}\DTLbaryticstrue\DTLbaryaxistrue}
-\let\dtlbar@yticgap=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define list of labels for $y$ tics.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{yticlabels}{%
-\def\dtlbar@yticlabels{#1}\DTLbaryticstrue\DTLbaryaxistrue}
-\let\dtlbar@yticlabels=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Define $y$ axis label.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\define@key{databar}{ylabel}{%
-\def\dtlbar@ylabel{#1}}
-\let\dtlbar@ylabel=\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLbarchart}\oarg{conditions}\marg{option list}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Make a bar chart from data given in data base \meta{db name},
-% where \meta{assign list} is a comma-separated list of
-% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. \meta{option list} must
-% include \texttt{variable}\texttt{=}\meta{cmd}, where \meta{cmd}
-% is included in \meta{assign list}. The optional argument
-% \meta{conditions} is the same as that for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarchart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLbarchart}[4][\boolean{true}]{%
-{\let\DTLbarvariable=\relax
-\let\DTLbarmax=\relax
-\let\DTLnegextent=\relax
-\disable@keys{databar}{variables,multibarlabels,%
-uppermultibarlabels,groupgap}%
-\setkeys{databar}{#2}%
-\ifx\DTLbarvariable\relax
-  \PackageError{databar}{\string\DTLbarchart\space missing variable}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the maximum bar height, unless \cs{DTLbarmax} has been
-% set.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax
-    \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-      \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-        {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}%
-      \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax
-        \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@barvar
-      \else
-        \let\dtl@old=\DTLbarmax
-        \FPmax{\DTLbarmax}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}%
-      \fi
-    }%
-    \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax
-    \else
-      \let\dtl@thistick=\dtlbar@yticgap%
-      \whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\dtl@thistick}{0}{\DTLbarmax}}{%
-        \FPadd{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}%
-      }%
-      \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@thistick
-    \fi
-  \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the bar depth, unless \cs{DTLnegextent} has been
-% set.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifx\DTLnegextent\relax
-    \def\DTLnegextent{0}%
-    \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-      \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-        {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}%
-      \let\dtl@old=\DTLnegextent
-      \DTLmin{\DTLnegextent}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}%
-    }%
-    \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax
-    \else
-      \ifthenelse{\DTLisFPlt{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{%
-      \edef\dtl@thistick{0}%
-      \whiledo{\DTLisFPclosedbetween{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{%
-        \FPsub{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}%
-      }%
-      \let\DTLnegextent=\dtl@thistick
-      }{}%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine scaling factor
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLbarchartlength
-  \FPsub{\dtl@extent}{\DTLbarmax}{\DTLnegextent}%
-  \FPdiv{\dtl@unit}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@extent}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Construct $y$ tick list if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{0pt}%
-   \ifDTLbarytics
-     \ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax
-       \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax
-         \dtl@constructticklist\DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax
-           \dtl@unit\dtlbar@yticlist
-       \else
-         \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz
-           \DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax\dtlbar@yticlist\dtlbar@yticgap
-       \fi
-     \fi
-     \ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax
-     \else
-       \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax
-         \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{%
-           \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thislabel}
-                   {\c@DTLbarroundvar}%
-           \ifDTLverticalbars
-             \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-           \else
-             \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}%
-             \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}%
-           \fi
-           \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-             \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-           \fi
-         }%
-       \else
-         \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlabels\do{%
-           \ifDTLverticalbars
-             \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-               \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-           \else
-             \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}%
-             \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}%
-           \fi
-           \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-             \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-           \fi
-         }%
-       \fi
-     \fi
-   \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store the width of the bar chart in \cs{DTLbarchartwidth}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\DTLbarchartwidth{\expandafter\number\csname dtlrows@#3\endcsname}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Do the bar chart
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{tikzpicture}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set unit vectors
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\dtl@unit sp}}%
-  \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\DTLbarwidth}{0pt}}%
-\else
-  \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\dtl@unit sp}{0pt}}%
-  \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLbarwidth}}%
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Begin hook
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLbaratbegintikz
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Initialise
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@start{0}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through data
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store the bar number in \cs{@dtl@bar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@bar
-  \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Convert variable to decimal
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-  {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@variable}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw bars
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{scope}
- \DTLdocurrentbarcolor
- \ifDTLverticalbars
-   \fill (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable)
-      -- (\@dtl@bar,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@bar,0) -- cycle;
- \else
-   \fill (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start)
-      -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@bar) -- (0,\@dtl@bar) -- cycle;
- \fi
-\end{scope}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw outline
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{scope}
-\ifdim\DTLbaroutlinewidth>0pt
- \expandafter\color\expandafter{\DTLbaroutlinecolor}
- \ifDTLverticalbars
-   \draw (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable)
-      -- (\@dtl@bar,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@bar,0) -- cycle;
- \else
-   \draw (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start)
-      -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@bar) -- (0,\@dtl@bar) -- cycle;
- \fi
-\fi
-\end{scope}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw lower $x$ labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@start.5}{0}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}},
-     \DTLbarXlabelalign
-  }%
-\else
-  \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\@dtl@start.5}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}},
-     \DTLbarXlabelalign
-  }%
-\fi
- \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-   \DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@barlabel}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw upper $x$ labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0}
-  {
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@start.5}{\dtl@variable}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}}
-    }%
-  }{%
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@start.5}{\dtl@variable}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}}
-    }%
-  }
-\else
-  \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0}
-  {
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{right,
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@start.5}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}}
-    }%
-  }{%
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{left,
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@start.5}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}}
-    }%
-  }
-\fi
- \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-    \DTLdisplayupperbarlabel{\dtl@upperbarlabel}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% End of loop
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \edef\@dtl@start{\number\@dtl@bar}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw $x$ axis
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLbarxaxis
-  \ifDTLverticalbars
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle]
-      (0,0) -- (\DTLbarchartwidth,0);
-  \else
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle]
-      (0,0) -- (0,\DTLbarchartwidth);
-  \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw $y$ axis
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLbaryaxis
-  \ifDTLverticalbars
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle]
-      (0,\DTLnegextent) -- (0,\DTLbarmax);
-  \else
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle]
-      (\DTLnegextent,0) -- (\DTLbarmax,0);
-  \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $y$ tick marks if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax
-\else
-  \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{%
-    \ifDTLverticalbars
-      \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}}
-      \pgfpathlineto{
-        \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                    {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}}
-    \else
-      \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}}
-      \pgfpathlineto{
-        \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}}
-                    {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}}
-    \fi
-    \pgfusepath{stroke}
-    \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax
-       \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick}
-               {\c@DTLbarroundvar}%
-    \else
-       \dtl@chopfirst\dtlbar@yticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest
-       \let\dtlbar@yticlabels=\dtl@rest
-    \fi
-    \ifDTLverticalbars
-      \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign,%
-        at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-             {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}}
-             {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}{0pt}},
-        }}%
-    \else
-      \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign,
-        at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-             {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}}
-             {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}}
-        }}%
-    \fi
-    \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-      \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}
-  }%
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot the $y$ label if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax
-\else
-  \addtolength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\baselineskip}%
-  \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLbarchartlength}
-  \ifDTLverticalbars
-    \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-        {\pgfpointxy{0}{\DTLnegextent}}%
-        {\pgfpoint{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}}},
-        rotate=90]{%
-       \dtlbar@ylabel}
-  \else
-    \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-        {\pgfpointxy{\DTLnegextent}{0}}%
-        {\pgfpoint{\dtl@tmplength}{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}}}]{%
-       \dtlbar@ylabel}
-  \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Finish bar chart
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLbaratendtikz
-\end{tikzpicture}
-\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{definition}
-% \cs{DTLmultibarchart}\oarg{conditions}\marg{option list}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list}
-%\end{definition}
-% Make a multi-bar chart from data given in data base \meta{db name},
-% where \meta{assign list} is a comma-separated list of
-% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. \meta{option list} must
-% include the \texttt{variables} key which must be a comma separated
-% list of commands, where each command
-% is included in \meta{assign list}. The optional argument
-% \meta{conditions} is the same as that for \cs{DTLforeach}.
-%\begin{macro}{\DTLmultibarchart}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\DTLmultibarchart}[4][\boolean{true}]{%
-{\let\dtlbar@variables=\relax
-\let\DTLbarmax=\relax
-\let\DTLnegextent=\relax
-\disable@keys{databar}{variable,upperbarlabel}%
-\setkeys{databar}{#2}%
-\ifx\dtlbar@variables\relax
-  \PackageError{databar}{\string\DTLmultibarchart\space missing variables setting}{}%
-\else
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the maximum bar height, unless \cs{DTLbarmax} has been
-% set.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax
-    \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-      \@for\DTLbarvariable:=\dtlbar@variables\do{%
-        \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-          {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}%
-        \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax
-          \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@barvar
-        \else
-          \let\dtl@old=\DTLbarmax
-          \FPmax{\DTLbarmax}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}%
-        \fi
-      }%
-    }%
-    \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax
-    \else
-      \let\dtl@thistick=\dtlbar@yticgap%
-      \whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\dtl@thistick}{0}{\DTLbarmax}}{%
-        \FPadd{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}%
-      }%
-      \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@thistick
-    \fi
-  \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the bar depth, unless \cs{DTLnegextent} has been
-% set.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \ifx\DTLnegextent\relax
-    \def\DTLnegextent{0}%
-    \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-      \@for\DTLbarvariable:=\dtlbar@variables\do{%
-        \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-          {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}%
-        \let\dtl@old=\DTLnegextent
-        \DTLmin{\DTLnegextent}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}%
-      }%
-    }%
-    \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax
-    \else
-      \ifthenelse{\DTLisFPlt{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{%
-      \edef\dtl@thistick{0}%
-      \whiledo{\DTLisFPclosedbetween{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{%
-        \FPsub{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}%
-      }%
-      \let\DTLnegextent=\dtl@thistick
-      }{}%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Determine scaling factor
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLbarchartlength
-  \FPsub{\dtl@extent}{\DTLbarmax}{\DTLnegextent}%
-  \FPdiv{\dtl@unit}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@extent}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Construct $y$ tick list if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{0pt}%
-   \ifDTLbarytics
-     \ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax
-       \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax
-         \dtl@constructticklist\DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax
-           \dtl@unit\dtlbar@yticlist
-       \else
-         \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz
-           \DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax\dtlbar@yticlist\dtlbar@yticgap
-       \fi
-     \fi
-     \ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax
-     \else
-       \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax
-         \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{%
-           \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thislabel}
-                   {\c@DTLbarroundvar}%
-           \ifDTLverticalbars
-             \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-           \else
-             \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}%
-             \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}%
-           \fi
-           \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-             \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-           \fi
-         }%
-       \else
-         \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlabels\do{%
-           \ifDTLverticalbars
-             \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-               \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-           \else
-             \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}%
-             \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{%
-                \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}%
-             \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}%
-           \fi
-           \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth
-             \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-           \fi
-         }%
-       \fi
-     \fi
-   \fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Calculate the offset for the lower label and number of labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dtl@xticlabelheight=0pt\relax
-\@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax
-\@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtl@multibarlabels\do{%
-  \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-  \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{\tikz\expandafter\pgftext\expandafter
-    [\DTLbarXlabelalign]{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@thislabel}};}%
-  \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}%
-  \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{\tikz\expandafter\pgftext\expandafter
-    [\DTLbarXlabelalign]{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@thislabel}};}%
-  \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}%
-  \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}%
-  \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@xticlabelheight
-    \setlength{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\dtl@tmplength}%
-  \fi
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Calculate number of bars per group
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax
-\@for\dtl@this:=\dtlbar@variables\do{%
-  \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax
-}%
-\edef\DTLbargroupwidth{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute the total width of the bar chart (in terms of 
-% the $x$ unit vector.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\dtl@n{\expandafter\number\csname dtlrows@#3\endcsname}
-\FPmul{\dtl@tmpi}{\dtl@n}{\DTLbargroupwidth}
-\FPsub{\dtl@tmpii}{\dtl@n}{1}%
-\FPmul{\dtl@tmpii}{\dtl@tmpii}{\dtlbar@groupgap}%
-\FPadd{\DTLbarchartwidth}{\dtl@tmpi}{\dtl@tmpii}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Do the bar chart
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{tikzpicture}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set unit vectors
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\dtl@unit sp}}%
-  \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\DTLbarwidth}{0pt}}%
-\else
-  \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\dtl@unit sp}{0pt}}%
-  \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLbarwidth}}%
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Begin hook
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLbaratbegintikz
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Initialise
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dtl@start{0}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through data
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Store the bar number in \cs{@dtl@bar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@dtl@barcount = 1\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set the multibar label lists
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\dtl@multibar@labels=\dtl@multibarlabels
-\let\dtl@uppermultibar@labels=\dtl@uppermultibarlabels
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Compute mid point over group
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\FPmul{\dtl@multimidpt}{\DTLbargroupwidth}{0.5}%
-\FPadd{\dtl@multimidpt}{\dtl@multimidpt}{\@dtl@start}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Iterate through each variable
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@for\DTLbarvariable:=\dtlbar@variables\do{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Set end point
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\FPadd{\@dtl@endpt}{\@dtl@start}{1}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Convert variable to decimal
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter
-  {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@variable}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Get the current lower label:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dtl@chopfirst\dtl@multibar@labels\dtl@thisbarlabel\dtl@rest
-\let\dtl@multibar@labels=\dtl@rest
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Get the current upper label:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dtl@chopfirst\dtl@uppermultibar@labels\dtl@thisupperbarlabel\dtl@rest
-\let\dtl@uppermultibar@labels=\dtl@rest
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw bars
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{scope}
- \expandafter\color\expandafter{\DTLgetbarcolor{\@dtl@barcount}}%
- \ifDTLverticalbars
-   \fill (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable)
-      -- (\@dtl@endpt,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@endpt,0) -- cycle;
- \else
-   \fill (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start)
-      -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@endpt) -- (0,\@dtl@endpt) -- cycle;
- \fi
-\end{scope}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw outline
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{scope}
-\ifdim\DTLbaroutlinewidth>0pt
- \expandafter\color\expandafter{\DTLbaroutlinecolor}
- \ifDTLverticalbars
-   \draw (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable)
-      -- (\@dtl@endpt,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@endpt,0) -- cycle;
- \else
-   \draw (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start)
-      -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@endpt) -- (0,\@dtl@endpt) -- cycle;
- \fi
-\fi
-\end{scope}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Calculate mid point
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\FPadd{\@dtl@midpt}{\@dtl@start}{0.5}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw lower $x$ labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@midpt}{0}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}},
-     \DTLbarXlabelalign
-  }%
-\else
-  \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\@dtl@midpt}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}},
-     \DTLbarXlabelalign
-  }%
-\fi
- \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-   \DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel{\dtl@thisbarlabel}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw upper $x$ labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0}
-  {
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@midpt}{\dtl@variable}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}}
-    }%
-  }{%
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@midpt}{\dtl@variable}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}}
-    }%
-  }
-\else
-  \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0}
-  {
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{right,
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@midpt}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}}
-    }%
-  }{%
-    \edef\dtl@textopt{left,
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@midpt}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}}
-    }%
-  }
-\fi
- \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-    \DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel{\dtl@thisupperbarlabel}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% End of loop increment loop variables
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\@dtl@start}{1}%
-  \advance\@dtl@barcount by 1\relax
-}%
-% Draw lower group $x$ labels
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{\DTLbarlabeloffset}%
-\addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\dtl@xticlabelheight}%
-\ifDTLverticalbars
-  \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@multimidpt}{0}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\dtl@tmplength}}},
-     \DTLbarXlabelalign
-  }%
-\else
-  \edef\dtl@textopt{%
-      at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-           {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@multimidpt}}
-           {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\dtl@tmplength}{0pt}}},
-     \DTLbarXlabelalign
-  }%
-\fi
- \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-   \DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@barlabel}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Increment starting position by \cs{dtlbar@groupgap}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\@dtl@start}{\dtlbar@groupgap}%
-}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw $x$ axis
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLbarxaxis
-  \ifDTLverticalbars
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle]
-      (0,0) -- (\DTLbarchartwidth,0);
-  \else
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle]
-      (0,0) -- (0,\DTLbarchartwidth);
-  \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Draw $y$ axis
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTLbaryaxis
-  \ifDTLverticalbars
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle]
-      (0,\DTLnegextent) -- (0,\DTLbarmax);
-  \else
-    \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle]
-      (\DTLnegextent,0) -- (\DTLbarmax,0);
-  \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot $y$ tick marks if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax
-\else
-  \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{%
-    \ifDTLverticalbars
-      \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}}
-      \pgfpathlineto{
-        \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}}
-                    {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}}
-    \else
-      \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}}
-      \pgfpathlineto{
-        \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}}
-                    {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}}
-    \fi
-    \pgfusepath{stroke}
-    \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax
-       \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick}
-               {\c@DTLbarroundvar}%
-    \else
-       \dtl@chopfirst\dtlbar@yticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest
-       \let\dtlbar@yticlabels=\dtl@rest
-    \fi
-    \ifDTLverticalbars
-      \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign,%
-        at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-             {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}}
-             {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}{0pt}},
-        }}%
-    \else
-      \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign,
-        at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd
-             {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}}
-             {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}}
-        }}%
-    \fi
-    \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{%
-      \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}
-  }%
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Plot the $y$ label if required
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax
-\else
-  \addtolength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\baselineskip}%
-  \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLbarchartlength}
-  \ifDTLverticalbars
-    \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-        {\pgfpointxy{0}{\DTLnegextent}}%
-        {\pgfpoint{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}}},
-        rotate=90]{%
-       \dtlbar@ylabel}
-  \else
-    \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd
-        {\pgfpointxy{\DTLnegextent}{0}}%
-        {\pgfpoint{\dtl@tmplength}{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}}}]{%
-       \dtlbar@ylabel}
-  \fi
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Finish bar chart
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DTLbaratendtikz
-\end{tikzpicture}
-\fi
-}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\iffalse
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</databar.sty>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%\Finale
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 8966a25bcbe..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-% datatool.ins generated using makedtx version 0.93b 2007/7/23 22:53
-\input docstrip
-
-\preamble
-Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
-If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
-You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
-ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
-file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
-etc.
-\endpreamble
-
-\askforoverwritefalse
-
-\generate{\file{datapie.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
-\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{datapie.sty,package}}
-\file{dataplot.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
-\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{dataplot.sty,package}}
-\file{datatool.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
-\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{datatool.sty,package}}
-\file{databar.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
-\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{databar.sty,package}}
-}
-
-\endbatchfile